all | frequencies |
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
manuals |
app s | submitted / available | |||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 |
|
USERS MANUAL 1 | Users Manual | 2.19 MiB | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||
1 |
|
USERS MANUAL 2 | Users Manual | 2.55 MiB | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||
1 |
|
USERS MANUAL 3 | Users Manual | 2.67 MiB | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||
1 | Block Diagram | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | ||||||
1 | External Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | External Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | External Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | External Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | ID Label/Location Info | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | ||||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Internal Photos | native | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | |||||
1 | Test Report | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 | ||||||
1 | Test Setup Photos | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 |
1 | USERS MANUAL 1 | Users Manual | 2.19 MiB | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 |
USING THE UNIT SAFELY Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of death or severe injury should the unit be used improperly. Used for instructions intended to alert the user to the risk of injury or material damage should the unit be used improperly.
* Material damage refers to damage or other adverse effects caused with respect to the home and all its furnishings, as well to domestic animals or pets. The symbol alerts the user to important instructions or warnings.The specific meaning of the symbol is determined by the design contained within the triangle. In the case of the symbol at left, it is used for general cautions, warnings, or alerts to danger. The symbol alerts the user to items that must never be carried out (are forbidden). The specific thing that must not be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the unit must never be disassembled. The symbol alerts the user to things that must be carried out. The specific thing that must be done is indicated by the design contained within the circle. In the case of the symbol at left, it means that the power-
cord plug must be unplugged from the outlet. 001 Before using this unit, make sure to read the instructions below, and the Owners Manual. ......................................................................................................... 002a Do not open or perform any internal modifica-
tions on the unit. ......................................................................................................... 003 Do not attempt to repair the unit, or replace parts within it (except when this manual provides specific instructions directing you to do so). Refer all servicing to your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the Information page. ......................................................................................................... 004 Never use or store the unit in places that are:
Subject to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle, near a heating duct, on top of heat-generating equipment); or are Damp (e.g., baths, washrooms, on wet floors);
or are Humid; or are Exposed to rain; or are Dusty; or are Subject to high levels of vibration. ......................................................................................................... 007 Make sure you always have the unit placed so it is level and sure to remain stable. Never place it on stands that could wobble, or on inclined surfaces. ......................................................................................................... 008a The unit should be connected to a power supply only of the type described in the operating instructions, or as marked on the rear of unit. ......................................................................................................... 008e Use only the attached power-supply cord. Also, the supplied power cord must not be used with any other device. ......................................................................................................... 009 Do not excessively twist or bend the power cord, nor place heavy objects on it. Doing so can damage the cord, producing severed elements and short circuits. Damaged cords are fire and shock hazards!
.......................................................................................................... 010 This unit, either alone or in combination with an amplifier and headphones or speakers, may be capable of producing sound levels that could cause permanent hearing loss. Do not operate for a long period of time at a high volume level, or at a level that is uncomfortable. If you experience any hearing loss or ringing in the ears, you should immediately stop using the unit, and consult an audiologist. ......................................................................................................... 011 Do not allow any objects (e.g., flammable material, coins, pins); or liquids of any kind
(water, soft drinks, etc.) to penetrate the unit. ......................................................................................................... 012a Immediately turn the power off, remove the power cord from the outlet, and request servicing by your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the Information page when:
The power-supply cord, or the plug has been damaged; or If smoke or unusual odor occurs Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto the unit; or The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has become wet); or The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance. ......................................................................................................... 3 103a At regular intervals, you should unplug the power plug and clean it by using a dry cloth to wipe all dust and other accumulations away from its prongs. Also, disconnect the power plug from the power outlet whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time. Any accumulation of dust between the power plug and the power outlet can result in poor insulation and lead to fire. ......................................................................................................... 104 Try to prevent cords and cables from becoming entangled. Also, all cords and cables should be placed so they are out of the reach of children. ......................................................................................................... 106 Never climb on top of, nor place heavy objects on the unit. ......................................................................................................... 107b Never handle the power cord or its plugs with wet hands when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit. ......................................................................................................... 108d: Selection If you need to move the instrument, take note of the precautions listed below. At least two persons are required to safely lift and move the unit. It should be handled carefully, all the while keeping it level. Make sure to have a firm grip, to protect yourself from injury and the instrument from damage. Check to make sure the screw securing the unit to the stand have not become loose. Fasten them again securely whenever you notice any loosening. Disconnect the power cord. Disconnect all cords coming from external devices. Raise the adjusters on the stand (p. 18). Close the lid. 1 2 3 4 5 7 Fold down the music rest. ......................................................................................................... 109a Before cleaning the unit, turn off the power and unplug the power cord from the outlet (p. 17). ......................................................................................................... 110a Whenever you suspect the possibility of lightning in your area, pull the plug on the power cord out of the outlet. ......................................................................................................... 013 In households with small children, an adult should provide supervision until the child is capable of following all the rules essential for the safe operation of the unit. ......................................................................................................... 014 Protect the unit from strong impact.
(Do not drop it!)
.......................................................................................................... 015 Do not force the units power-supply cord to share an outlet with an unreasonable number of other devices. Be especially careful when using extension cordsthe total power used by all devices you have connected to the extension cords outlet must never exceed the power rating
(watts/amperes) for the extension cord. Excessive loads can cause the insulation on the cord to heat up and eventually melt through. ......................................................................................................... 016 Before using the unit in a foreign country, consult with your retailer, the nearest Roland Service Center, or an authorized Roland distributor, as listed on the Information page. ......................................................................................................... 019 Batteries must never be recharged, heated, taken apart, or thrown into fire or water. ......................................................................................................... 023 DO NOT play a CD-ROM disc on a conventional audio CD player. The resulting sound may be of a level that could cause permanent hearing loss. Damage to speakers or other system components may result. ......................................................................................................... 026 Do not put anything that contains water (e.g., flower vases) on this unit. Also, avoid the use of insecticides, perfumes, alcohol, nail polish, spray cans, etc., near the unit. Swiftly wipe away any liquid that spills on the unit using a dry, soft cloth. ......................................................................................................... 101a The unit should be located so that its location or position does not interfere with its proper venti-
lation. ......................................................................................................... 102b Always grasp only the plug on the power-supply cord when plugging into, or unplugging from, an outlet or this unit. ......................................................................................................... 4 111: Selection If used improperly, batteries may explode or leak and cause damage or injury. In the interest of safety, please read and observe the following precautions (p. 17). 1 2 3 5 6 Carefully follow the installation instructions for batteries, and make sure you observe the correct polarity. Avoid using new batteries together with used ones. In addition, avoid mixing different types of batteries. Remove the batteries whenever the unit is to remain unused for an extended period of time. If a battery has leaked, use a soft piece of cloth or paper towel to wipe all remnants of the discharge from the battery compartment. Then install new batteries. To avoid inflammation of the skin, make sure that none of the battery discharge gets onto your hands or skin. Exercise the utmost caution so that none of the discharge gets near your eyes. Immediately rinse the affected area with running water if any of the discharge has entered the eyes. Never keep batteries together with metallic objects such as ballpoint pens, necklaces, hairpins, etc. ......................................................................................................... 112 Used batteries must be disposed of in compliance with whatever regulations for their safe disposal that may be observed in the region in which you live. The power-supply cord, or the plug has been damaged; or If smoke or unusual odor occurs Objects have fallen into, or liquid has been spilled onto the unit; or The unit has been exposed to rain (or otherwise has become wet); or The unit does not appear to operate normally or exhibits a marked change in performance. ......................................................................................................... 116 Be careful when opening/closing the lid so you do not get your fingers pinched (p. 17). Adult supervision is recommended whenever small children use the unit. ......................................................................................................... 118c Always keep the following parts including with the RG-7 and small components that may be removed out of the reach of small children to avoid accidental ingestion of these parts. Included Parts External memory anti-theft lock securing screw Removable parts Screws fastening the stand Screws fastening music rest the thumbscrew fastening the headphone hook
.......................................................................................................... 5 IMPORTANT NOTES 291b In addition to the items listed under IMPORTANT SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS and USING THE UNIT SAFELY on pages 2 and 3, please read and observe the following:
Power Supply 301 Do not connect this unit to same electrical outlet that is being used by an electrical appliance that is controlled by an inverter
(such as a refrigerator, washing machine, microwave oven, or air conditioner), or that contains a motor. Depending on the way in which the electrical appliance is used, power supply noise may cause this unit to malfunction or may produce audible noise. If it is not practical to use a separate electrical outlet, connect a power supply noise filter between this unit and the electrical outlet. 306b Batteries are supplied with the unit. The life of these batteries may be limited, however, since their primary purpose was to enable testing. 307 Before connecting this unit to other devices, turn off the power to all units. This will help prevent malfunctions and/or damage to speakers or other devices. 308 Although the LCD and LEDs are switched off when the POWER switch is switched off, this does not mean that the unit has been completely disconnected from the source of power. If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. For this reason, the outlet into which you choose to connect the power cords plug should be one that is within easy reach and readily accessible. Placement 351 Using the unit near power amplifiers (or other equipment containing large power transformers) may induce hum. To alleviate the problem, change the orientation of this unit; or move it farther away from the source of interference. 352a This device may interfere with radio and television reception. Do not use this device in the vicinity of such receivers. 352b Noise may be produced if wireless communications devices, such as cell phones, are operated in the vicinity of this unit. Such noise could occur when receiving or initiating a call, or while conversing. Should you experience such problems, you should relocate such wireless devices so they are at a greater distance from this unit, or switch them off. 354b Do not expose the unit to direct sunlight, place it near devices that radiate heat, leave it inside an enclosed vehicle, or otherwise subject it to temperature extremes. Also, do not allow lighting devices that normally are used while their light source is very close to the unit (such as a piano light), or powerful spotlights to shine upon the same area of the unit for extended periods of time. Excessive heat can deform or discolor the unit. 355b When moved from one location to another where the temper-
ature and/or humidity is very different, water droplets (conden-
sation) may form inside the unit. Damage or malfunction may result if you attempt to use the unit in this condition. Therefore, before using the unit, you must allow it to stand for several hours, until the condensation has completely evaporated. 356 Do not allow rubber, vinyl, or similar materials to remain on the unit for long periods of time. Such objects can discolor or otherwise harmfully affect the finish. 358 Do not allow objects to remain on top of the keyboard. This can be the cause of malfunction, such as keys ceasing to produce sound. 6 359 Do not paste stickers, decals, or the like to this instrument. Peeling such matter off the instrument may damage the exterior finish. Maintenance 401b To clean the unit, use a dry, soft cloth; or one that is slightly dampened. Try to wipe the entire surface using an equal amount of strength, moving the cloth along with the grain of the wood. Rubbing too hard in the same area can damage the finish. 402 Never use benzine, thinners, alcohol or solvents of any kind, to avoid the possibility of discoloration and/or deformation. 403 The pedals of this unit are made of brass. Brass eventually darkens as the result of the natural oxidization process. If the brass becomes tarnished, polish it using commer-
cially available metal polisher. Repairs and Data 452 Please be aware that all data contained in the units memory may be lost when the unit is sent for repairs. Important data should always be backed up on an external memory, or written down on paper (when possible). During repairs, due care is taken to avoid the loss of data. However, in certain cases (such as when circuitry related to memory itself is out of order), we regret that it may not be possible to restore the data, and Roland assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. Additional Precautions 551 Please be aware that the contents of memory can be irretrievably lost as a result of a malfunction, or the improper operation of the unit. To protect yourself against the risk of loosing important data, we recommend that you periodically save a backup copy of important data you have stored in the units memory on an external memory. 552 Unfortunately, it may be impossible to restore the contents of data that was stored on an external memory once it has been lost. Roland Corporation assumes no liability concerning such loss of data. 553 Use a reasonable amount of care when using the units buttons, sliders, or other controls; and when using its jacks and connectors. Rough handling can lead to malfunctions. 554 Never strike or apply strong pressure to the display. 556 When connecting / disconnecting all cables, grasp the connector itselfnever pull on the cable. This way you will avoid causing shorts, or damage to the cables internal elements. 557 A small amount of heat will radiate from the unit during normal operation. 558a To avoid disturbing your neighbors, try to keep the units volume at reasonable levels. You may prefer to use headphones, so you do not need to be concerned about those around you (especially when it is late at night). 559b When you need to transport the unit, pack it in shock-absorbent material. Transporting the unit without doing so can cause it to become scratched or damaged, and could lead to malfunction. 560 Do not apply undue force to the music rest while it is in use. 561 Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit. 562 Use a cable from Roland to make the connection. If using some other make of connection cable, please note the following precau-
tions. Some connection cables contain resistors. Do not use cables that incorporate resistors for connecting to this unit. The use of such cables can cause the sound level to be extremely low, or impossible to hear. For information on cable specifications, contact the manufacturer of the cable. 565 Before opening or closing the keyboard lid, always make sure that no pets or other small animals are located on top of the instrument (in particular, they should be kept away from the keyboard and its lid). Otherwise, due to the structural design of this instrument, small pets or other animals could end up getting trapped inside it. If such a situation is encountered, you must immediately switch off the power and disconnect the power cord from the outlet. You should then consult with the retailer from whom the instrument was purchased, or contact the nearest Roland Service Center. Handling Floppy Disks 651 Floppy disks contain a plastic disk with a thin coating of magnetic storage medium. Microscopic precision is required to enable storage of large amounts of data on such a small surface area. To preserve their integrity, please observe the following when handling floppy disks:
Never touch the magnetic medium inside the disk. Do not use or store floppy disks in dirty or dusty areas. Do not subject floppy disks to temperature extremes (e.g., direct sunlight in an enclosed vehicle). Recommended temperature range: 10 to 50C (50 to 122F). Do not expose floppy disks to strong magnetic fields, such as those generated by loudspeakers. 652 Floppy disks have a write protect tab which can protect the disk from accidental erasure. It is recommended that the tab be kept in the PROTECT position, and moved to the WRITE position only when you wish to write new data onto the disk. fig.DiskProtect.e Rear side of the disk Write
(can write new data onto disk) Write Protect Tab Protect
(prevents writing to disk) 653 The identification label should be firmly affixed to the disk. Should the label come loose while the disk is in the drive, it may be difficult to remove the disk. 654 Store all disks in a safe place to avoid damaging them, and to protect them from dust, dirt, and other hazards. By using a dirty or dust-ridden disk, you risk damaging the disk, as well as causing the disk drive to malfunction. 655 Disks containing performance data for this unit should always be locked (have their write protect tab slid to the Protect position) before you insert them into the drive on some other unit (except the PR-300, or a product in the HP-G, HPi, MT, KR, or Atelier families), or into a computers drive. Otherwise (if the write protect tab remains in the Write position), when you perform any disk operations using the other devices disk drive (such as checking the contents of the disk, or loading data), you risk rendering the disk unreadable by this units disk drive. Handling CD-ROMs 801 Avoid touching or scratching the shiny underside (encoded surface) of the disc. Damaged or dirty CD-ROM discs may not be read properly. Keep your discs clean using a commercially available CD cleaner. Before Using External Memory Using External Memory 705 Never touch the terminals of the External memory. Also, avoid getting the terminals dirty. 708 External memories are constructed using precision components; handle the cards carefully, paying particular note to the following. To prevent damage to the cards from static electricity, be sure to discharge any static electricity from your own body before handling the cards. Do not touch or allow metal to come into contact with the contact portion of the cards. Do not bend, drop, or subject cards to strong shock or vibration. Do not keep cards in direct sunlight, in closed vehicles, or other such locations (storage temperature: 0 to 50 C). Do not allow cards to become wet. Do not disassemble or modify the cards. 704 (revise) When connecting external memory, make sure to press it until it is fully inserted. Insert the external memory in the External Memory port evenly and without undue force. Forcing the external memory may damage the External Memory port. Do not insert any object other than the external memory
(e.g., wires, coins, other types of disks, etc.) in the External Memory port. This may damage the External Memory port. Do not subject the External Memory port cover or connected External memory to excessive stress. Close the external memory cover when using the External memory for extended periods 203
* GS (
ration.
) is a registered trademark of Roland Corpo-
* XG lite (
) is a registered trademark of Yamaha Corpo-
ration. 220
* All product names mentioned in this document are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of their respective owners. 7 Introduction Thank you, and congratulations on your choice of the Roland KR Intelligent Piano. While the KR Intelligent Piano certainly allows you to achieve authentic piano performances, it also features easy-to-use Automatic Accompaniment and numerous other useful functions. In order to enjoy reliable performance of your new keyboard for many years to come, please take the time to read through this manual in its entirety. Main Features Lusciously Resounding, Richly Expressive Piano Sound The KR107 reproduces the rich tones of a high-quality grand piano, from the sounds of the hammers as they strike the strings to the sounds made as the keys are released. 128-voice polyphony ensures full responsiveness, even with heavy use of the pedals. What's more, The Piano Designer feature allows you to create your own favorite piano tones. True Grand Piano Feel The KR107 features Roland's Progressive Hammer Action keyboard, which reproduces the feel of a grand piano, with a firm, weighty touch in the lower registers and a lighter response in the upper registers. This keyboard also faithfully reproduces the distinctive click that's produced when a grand piano's keys are played (Escapement function). In addition to the ability of adjusting the key weight, a Hammer Response function, which reproduces the subtle action of the hammers, is also incorporated, so there are two key-touch controls that come into play when determining the precise character of the keyboard. Additionally, the instrument's pedals are firm and responsive, lending your performances fuller and more detailed expressiveness. Accomplish Tasks Easily with the Main Buttons Almost all of the KRs common functions, including playing back songs, displaying notations, running the automatic accompaniment, selecting tones, and so on can be accomplished using the Main buttons to the left of the screen. A Wealth of Practice Features to Foster Musical Growth Use the Visual Lesson feature for enjoyable practice and steady improvement. You can use this function to score the results of your performances and find out which notes have been played differently than those indicated in the notation. The KR also scrolls the notation automatically as you play, making your practices even more convenient. Connector Allows Enlarged Display of Music and Lyrics The KR107 is equipped with a connector for use with televisions and other external displays. Connecting a large screen to the KR107 allows you to display a greater number of measures at the same time. Notes are colored for easy viewing, a feature that is useful for personal practice as well as in lessons. Easy-To-Use Music Assistant Automatic Accompaniment Feature You can select from an amazing 500 settings to get automatic accompaniment that perfectly matches the song you are playing. Each song's Music Assistant settings are shown in a manner that is easy to grasp, so playing along with the changes in the accompaniment is a snap. For easy enjoyment of Music Assistant, the KR107 also includes songs that you can perform while reading the chord charts. 8 Introduction Color Display for Easy Operation The KR107 features a color screen touch panel with rich graphics to make viewing easier. Operations can be carried out easily, just by touching the screen. Utilizes External Memory--the New Media You can save song data created on the KR107 to External memory (sold separately). Extremely portable, high-capacity external memory also connects easily to computers, allowing song data to be transferred easily. Taking further advantage of the high-capacity memory, you can also play back audio files with the KR107. How To Use This Manual USB Install
(this volume). and the Quick Start
. Owners Manual Quick Start Owners Manual,
, The KR Owners Manual consists of two volumes, Guide
. Please start out by reading Before You Start Playing (p. 16) in the This explains how to connect the KRs power cord and how to turn on the instruments power. After turning on the KRs power, please continue by reading By trying out the various procedures while reading the the KR and make use of its major functions (especially procedures that involve use of the main buttons). The applications (for example, using the KR as an accompanist and creating songs), that will help you master the KRs many performance functions. When connecting a computer to the USB port, be sure to read the computer connection guide. This describes the procedure for installing the driver needed to connect via USB. For more on system requirements, refer to the USB Installation Guide. However, note that the KR107 is not compatible with Mac OS 9. describes procedures, from basic operation to procedures for special Owners Manual Quick Start
, you can easily learn how to play
Conventions Used in This Manual This manual uses the following conventions in the interest of simpler, more concise instructions. Button names are enclosed in square brackets [ ], as in One Touch Program [Piano]
button. For easier readability, some screens and colors used here may differ in part from actual screens and colors. On screen text is enclosed in angled brackets < >, as in <Exit>. The act of lightly contacting the Touch Screen with your finger is called touching. An asterisk (*) or a NOTE at the beginning of a paragraph indicates a note or precaution. These should not be ignored.
(p. **) refers to pages within the manual. 9 Contents USING THE UNIT SAFELY...............................................................3 IMPORTANT NOTES.........................................................................6 Introduction ...............................................................8 Main Features.......................................................................................8 How To Use This Manual ..................................................................9 Conventions Used in This Manual..............................................9 Panel Descriptions..................................................10 Balance...........................................................................................10 Performance Pads ........................................................................10 Rhythm Partner............................................................................10 Record/Playback .........................................................................11 Rear Panel ...........................................................................................12 Bottom Panel ......................................................................................12 Bottom Panel (Front Left) ...........................................................12 Bottom Panel (Front Right).........................................................12 Before You Start Playing ........................................18 Connect the Pedal Cable...................................................................18 Connect the Speaker Cable...............................................................18 Connect the Power Cord ..................................................................18 Setting Up the Music Rest ................................................................18 Folding Down the Music Rest....................................................18 Using the Music Holders ............................................................18 Removing the Music Rest ...........................................................18 Installing Batteries in the Remote Control.....................................19 Opening/Closing the Lid.................................................................19 Turning the Power On and Off........................................................19 About the Pedals................................................................................20 Adjusting the Sounds Volume and Brilliance ..............................20 Connecting Headphones ..................................................................20 Using the Headphone Hook.......................................................21 Connecting a Microphone ................................................................21 About the Touch Screen ...................................................................21 Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen ........................................21 Main Screens ......................................................................................22 Piano Screen..................................................................................22 Basic Screen...................................................................................22 Using the Main Icons...................................................................22 The [Option] Button and The [Exit] Button .............................22 The Scroll Bar and The Page Icon ..............................................22 Chapter 1 Performance...........................................23 Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano (One-Touch Piano) ..............23 Performing with a Variety of Tones (Tone Buttons) ....................24 Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects ..................25 Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search) ..............26 Performing with Multiple Sounds Layered Together (Layer)....27 Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands (Split) .28 Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave Shift)..29 Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb)...............................30 Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You Play
(Advanced 3D) ...................................................................................32 Adding Liveliness to the Sound (Dynamic Emphasis) ................34 Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality
(Equalizer)...........................................................................................35 Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects) .........................................37 Adding Effects to Mic Vocals (Vocal Effect)..................................38 Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files .................44 Using the Metronome .......................................................................45 Using the Metronome..................................................................45 Changing the Metronome Settings............................................46 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment ................. 48 Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment..............................48 Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment
(One-Touch Arranger) .....................................................................49 About Chords ...............................................................................50 Playing Chords with Simple Fingering
(Chord Intelligence).....................................................................50 Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder)..............................51 Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons) ................................52 Selecting Music Styles on External Memories .........................53 Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles
(Style Search) ................................................................................54 Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns ..................................55 Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo ..........................................55 Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment ..................................56 Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard (Sync)........................................56 Stopping Automatic Accompaniment ......................................57 Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
(Countdown) ................................................................................58 Modifying an Accompaniment........................................................59 Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
(Fill In Buttons).............................................................................59 Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen .................60 Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles
(Style Orchestrator)......................................................................60 Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand Part
(Melody Intelligence) ........................................................................61 Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance
(Lower Tone) ......................................................................................62 Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added
(Piano Style Arranger) ......................................................................63 Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part (Balance)...............64 Changing the Volume Balance between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob).............................................64 Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part
(Part Balance)................................................................................64 Chapter 3 Song Playback ...................................... 66 Playing a Song....................................................................................66 Using Keywords to Search for Songs (Song Search)...............69 Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites)...................................70 Removing Songs from Favorites................................................71 10 Contents Using the Remote Control................................................................72 How to Use the Remote Control................................................72 About the Remote Control .........................................................73 Chapter 4 Practice Functions ................................75 Displaying the Notation ...................................................................75 Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds
(Touch the Notes).........................................................................76 Scrolling the Notation Along with the Performances
(Auto Sync DigiScore) .................................................................76 Making Detailed Settings for the Notation Display ...............77 Saving Notations as Image Data................................................80 Adjusting the Tempo ........................................................................82 Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time
(Tap Tempo) .................................................................................82 Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute) .......................83 Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count)..................84 Muting Some Parts Before Playing (Track Buttons).....................85 Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker)...........................86 Placing a Marker within a Song.................................................86 Playback from a Marker Location .............................................87 Erasing a Marker..........................................................................87 Moving a Marker .........................................................................87 Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over......................88 Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back
(Transpose) .........................................................................................89 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance . 91 Recording a New Song (New Song) ...............................................92 Recording With Accompaniment....................................................94 Recording Along with a Song..........................................................96 Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons
(Redoing Recordings) .......................................................................97 Erasing Recorded Performances .....................................................98 Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks............................98 Changing How Recording Stops.....................................................98 Recording Songs Starting with Pickups .........................................99 Using External Memories...............................................................100 Connecting and Ejecting a External Memory ........................100 Formatting Media (Format)......................................................101 Saving Songs ....................................................................................103 Deleting Saved Songs......................................................................106 Copying Songs on External Memories to Favorites ...................107 Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to External Memories...108 Chapter 6 User Program Registration.................109 Saving Performance Settings (User Program).............................109 Calling Up Saved User Programs .................................................110 Changing the Way User Programs Are Called Up ...............110 Saving the User Program Sets........................................................110 Loading Saved User Program Sets ..........................................111 Deleting Saved User Program Sets ...............................................112 11 Copying Sets of User Programs on Floppy Disks to the User Memory.............................................................................................112 Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to Floppy Disks...............................................................................113 Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs ...................................113 Selecting the Pedal Used for Switching Settings
(Pedal Shift).................................................................................113 Sequential Loading of User Program Sets Stored in External Memory (Load Next) .................................................113 Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting PC Numbers .....................................................................................113 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs .............. 115 Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer)........115 The 16-Track Sequencer Screen................................................115 Modifying the Settings of Each Part........................................116 Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre
(Tone Set).....................................................................................117 Recording a Performance..........................................................117 Changing the Recording Method (Rec Mode).............................118 Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording
(Replace Recording)...................................................................119 Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds
(Mix Recording) .........................................................................119 Repeated Recording at the Same Location
(Loop Recording) .......................................................................120 Re-Recording Part of Your Performance
(Punch-in Recording) ................................................................121 Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords
(Chord Sequencer)...........................................................................122 Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard .................123 Editing Songs ...................................................................................123 Basic Operation of the Editing Functions...............................123 Undoing Edits (Undo)...............................................................124 Copying Measures (Copy)........................................................124 Correcting Timing Discrepancies (Quantize) ........................125 Deleting Measures (Delete) ......................................................125 Inserting Blank Measures (Insert)............................................126 Transposing Individual Parts (Transpose).............................126 Making Measures Blank (Erase) ..............................................126 Exchanging Parts (Part Exchange)...........................................127 Correcting Notes One by One (Note Edit) .............................128 Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song (PC Edit) ................128 Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song (Beat Map).............129 Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs.....................................129 Changing the Tempo Within the Song.........................................129 Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song ..................129 Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure.......................130 Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles ........................ 131 Creating Original Styles (User Styles) ..........................................131 Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles
(Style Composer)........................................................................131 Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself
(Style Converter) ........................................................................133 Saving a User Style..........................................................................136 Deleting Saved User Styles.......................................................137 Copying Styles on Floppy Disks to the User Memory...............138 Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to Floppy Disks...............................................................................138 Chapter 9 Various Settings ..................................139 Changing the Settings for One-Touch Arranger.........................139 Procedure ....................................................................................139 Adjusting the Keyboard Touch (Key Touch).........................139 Changing the Keyboards Split Point (Split Point) ...............140 Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo (One Touch Setting) .....................................................140 Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified
(Arranger Config) ......................................................................140 Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure .............................142 Changing the Settings for the Count ............................................142 Other Settings...................................................................................143 Procedure ....................................................................................143 Changing the Tuning (Tuning)................................................144 Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User Functions) ...............................................145 Changing the Bend Range (Pedal Setting) .............................147 Changing Standard Pitch (Master Tune)................................147 Changing the Language (Language).......................................147 Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays
(User Image Display).................................................................148 Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On (Opening Message) ...............................................148 Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off (Memory Backup) .................................................149 Restoring the Factory Settings (Factory Reset)......................149 Changing the Functions of the Remote Controls Buttons ..150 Switching the Remote Sensor On and Off (iR function) ......151 Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch Screen)........................151 Selecting the Part to Which the Effect is Added (Effects Part)..151 Formatting the User Memory ........................................................152 Automatically Starting the Quick Tour........................................152 Adjusting the Piano Designer Resonance ....................................153 Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance
(Panel Lock)......................................................................................153 Detailed Song Playback Settings ...................................................154 Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs
(Play Mode).................................................................................154 Viewing Song Information (Information) .............................154 Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics).........................................................154 Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback (Track Assign).....................................155 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices ...........156 Connecting an External Display or Television............................156 Connecting an External Display ..............................................156 Contents Connecting a Television............................................................157 Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television (External Display) ......158 Connecting Video Equipment (V-LINK) .....................................158 Using the V-LINK function ......................................................158 Connecting MIDI Devices ..............................................................159 Connectors ..................................................................................159 Making the Connections ...........................................................160 Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments
(MIDI Ensemble)..............................................................................160 MIDI Settings ...................................................................................161 Selecting the Transmit Channel (Tx Channel).......................161 Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard (Local Control) .........................................................161 Sending Tone Change Messages (Program Change/
Bank Select MSB/Bank Select LSB) .........................................162 Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device
(Composer MIDI Out) ...............................................................162 Connecting to Audio Equipment ..................................................163 Connectors ..................................................................................163 Making the Connections ...........................................................163 Connecting a Computer..................................................................164 Connect to the MIDI Connectors .............................................164 Connect to the USB Connector.................................................165 Making the Settings for the USB Driver .................................165 Troubleshooting...............................................................................166 Appendices........................................................... 166 Error Messages.................................................................................170 Tone List............................................................................................171 Drum Set List....................................................................................173 Effects List.........................................................................................177 Music Style List................................................................................178 Chord List .........................................................................................179 Internal Song List.............................................................................181 Parameters Stored to Internal Memory........................................183 Music Files That the KR Can Use ..................................................184 The KR allows you to use the following music files.............184 About the KR Sound Generator...............................................184 Main Specifications..........................................................................186 MIDI Implementation Chart ..........................................................186 Index...................................................................... 187 12 Panel Descriptions 3 5 7 9 11 12 14 18 19 20 2 Power 4 1 6 8 10 13 15 16 17 21 22 13. [1]-[3] buttons The operation of each is changed depending on the buttons numbered 11-12. 14. Music Style buttons Selects a Music Style for automatic accompaniment (p. 62). Pressing the [User] button selects a User Style that youve made yourself or a Music Style on floppy disk (p. 63). 15. Fill In buttons Inserts a fill-in in an automatic accompaniment and changes the accompaniment pattern (p. 69).
[To Variation] button
[To Original] button 16. [Intro/Ending] button Play an intro or ending during automatic accompaniment (p. 66). 17. [Start/Stop] button Starts and stops automatic accompaniment (p. 66). Rhythm Partner 18. [Count/Marker] button You can change the count settings (p. 160). These allow you to add and move markers in the notation as well as repeat playback of song segments simply and easily. 19. [Metronome] button Activates the built-in metronome (p. 52). 20. Beat Indicator This lights up in correspondence with the beat of the selected song or accompaniment. 21. Tempo [-] [+] buttons Adjusts the tempo. Press the [-] and [+] buttons at the same time to return to the original tempo. 1. 2. 3. 4.
[Power] switch Pressed to switch the power on and off (p. **).
[Volume] knob Adjusts the overall volume (p. **).
[Sound Control] button. Add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and distinctness.
[Brilliance] knob Adjusts the brightness of the sound (p. **). Balance 5.
[Part Balance] button This adjusts the relative volume levels of each of the performance parts (p. **). 6. 7. 8. 9.
[Balance] knob Changes the volume balance for sounds played with the keyboard and for songs and accompaniments (p. **).
[Transpose] button Transposes the pitch of the keyboard or the song being played
(p. **).
[Vocal Effect] Button Applies a variety of effects to vocals from the microphone (p.
[Ambience/Reverb] button Adds reverberation to the sound (p. **). Adds three-dimensional breadth to the sound 10. [User Program] button Stores the selected functions and states of the buttons (p. **). Performance Pads 11. [Style Orchestrator] button This is used to change the arrangement type for automatic accompaniment with the Performance Pads (p. **). 12. [User Function] Button This is used to assign a variety of functions to the Performance Pads (p. **). 13 23 24 27 28 31 32 38 40 Panel Descriptions 2526 29 30 3334353637 39 22. Main Buttons
-> See the Quick Start
[Song/File] button Use this button to select internal songs or songs from floppy disk (p. **).
[DigiScore] button Displays scores (p. **).
[Visual Lesson] button You can use the practice function.
[Piano Designer] button
[Music Assistant] button
[Super Tones] button 23. Touch Screen This lets you perform a variety of operations just by touching the screen (p. **). 24. Dial Use this to change on-screen values. 25. [Exit] button Returns you to the previous screen. 26. [Option] button Displays a screen for advance function settings. 27. Contrast knob Adjusts the contrast of the screen (p. **). 28. [Tone] buttons Select the Tones that will be played from the keyboard (p. **). 29. One Touch Program button
[Piano] button Makes the optimal settings for a piano performance (p. **).
[Arranger] button Makes the optimal settings for playing with automatic accompaniment (p. **). 30. [Melody Intelligence] Button Adds harmony to the sounds played with the keyboard (p. **). Record/Playback 31. [Menu] button You can select functions for playing back, recording or editing a song (p. **, p. **). 32. Track buttons Used to play back or record each track of a song (p. **, p. **). 33. [
(Reset)] button Resets the song playback-start location to the beginning of the song. 34. [
(Play/Stop)] button Starts and stops playback or recording a song. 35. [
(Rec)] button When pressed, this button places the instrument in recording standby (p. **, p. **). 36. [
(Bwd)] button Rewinds the song. 37. [
(Fwd)] button Fast-forwards the song. 38. Infrared Receiver Point the remote control at this sensor when using the remote control to operate the KR107 (p. **). 39. [Wonderland/Game] button Here you can learn about instruments while having fun.
-> See the Quick Start 40. External memory port Connects an external memory to play and save songs (p.**).
* Be sure to close the cover of the External Memory port after connecting USB memory to the External Memory port. If the cover is left open, someone could get hurt if their legs bump into it; the cover could be damaged as well. 14 Panel Descriptions Rear Panel fig.panelRear 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 1. Speaker Jack 5. Pedal connector Connect the speaker cable of the stand (p. **). Connect the pedal cable of the stand to this connector (p. **). 2. Ext Display connector Connect an external display. You can put notations on the screen and display lyrics (p. **). 3. Video Out Connector Connect a television here. This allows you to display the notations and lyrics on the connected television set (p. **). 4. Expression Pedal jack You can connect an expression pedal to the KR. 6. Input jacks These jacks can be connected to another sound generating device or an audio device, so that the sound of that device will be output from the KRs speakers (p. **). 7. Output jacks These jacks can be connected to your audio system to enjoy more powerful sound. They can also be connected to a tape recorder or similar device in order to record your performance on a cassette tape (p. **). Bottom Panel Bottom Panel (Front Left) Bottom Panel (Front Right) fig.panelbottom fig.panelUSB 1 2 3 4 5 6 1. Phones jacks A set of headphones can be connected here (p. **). 2. Mic Volume knob 6. Floppy Disk Drive Connector Connects an optional floppy disk drive to play and save songs
(p.**). Adjusts the volume level for the microphone (p. **).
* Use floppy disk drive available from Roland. 3. Mic In jack Used for connecting microphones (p. **). 4. MIDI Out/In connectors These can be connected to an external MIDI device to exchange performance data (p. **). 5. USB Connector You can connect a computer and exchange performance data between the instrument and the computer (p. **). 15 g Before You Start Playing u o Y e r o f e B i l n y a P t r a t S Connect the Pedal Cable Connect the Power Cord Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the rear panel of the KR107. fig.00-01 Insert the included power cord into the AC inlet on the bottom panel of the KR107, and then plug it into an electrical outlet. NOTE Be sure to use the supplied power cord. fig.00-02 Connect the Speaker Cable As shown in the diagram, connect the speaker cable leading from the speaker box of the stand to the speaker connector located on the rear panel of the KR107. Push the speaker cable in until it clicks into position. Setting Up the Music Rest 1. Grasping the music rest with both hands, lift it toward you until its in the upright position. KR107 Rear 2. Use the support on the back of the music rest to keep Clip portion Speaker connector Speaker cable NOTE Do not place containers holding liquids (such as flower vases), insecticide, perfume, alcohol, or similar substances on top of this piano. The speakers of this piano are mounted beneath the upper surface, and face upwards. Malfunctions or accidents may occur if liquids contact any part of the speakers. the stand in place. The angle of the music rest can be set to any of three positions. fig.mu_stand 1 2 Folding Down the Music Rest 1. Raise the support located on the back of the music rest, Speakers then gently fold down the music rest. Using the Music Holders You can use the holders to hold pages in place. When not using the holders, leave them folded down. fig.mu_stand4 16 S t a r t P a y n g l i B e f o r e Y o u Removing the Music Rest You can remove the music rest from the piano. This allows you to place a notebook computer on the piano. Position the music rest so its upright, then remove the three screws, as shown. You can remove the screws using a coin. fig.mu_stand3 Before You Start Playing Opening/Closing the Lid To open the lid, use both hands to lift it lightly, and slide it away from yourself. To close the lid, pull it gently toward yourself, and lower it softly after it has been fully extended. fig.00-05 NOTE When opening and closing the lid, be careful not to let your fingers get caught. If small children will be using the KR107, adult supervision should be provided. NOTE NOTE Be careful not to lose the screws that you removed from the music rest, or put them where they might be swallowed by small children. If you need to move the piano, make sure the lid is closed first to prevent accidents. Installing Batteries in the Remote Control Turning the Power On and Off Install the batteries provided in the remote control. fig.Remote Control-1.j Remote Controls (Rear) Remote Controls Cover 1. 2. 3. Open the battery cover on the back of the remote control. Insert the supplied AA batteries, as shown in the figure of remote control. Close the battery cover. NOTE Be careful to observe the correct polarity (+, - direction) when installing the batteries. NOTE Turn on power to your various devices in the order specified. By turning on devices in the wrong order, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to speakers and other devices. 941 To turn the power on, turn the [Volume] knob all the way down, and then press the [Power] switch. The power will turn on, and the Power indicator at the left front of the KR107 will light. After a few seconds, you will be able to play the keyboard to produce sound. Use the [Volume] knob to adjust the volume. NOTE This unit is equipped with a protection circuit. A brief interval (a few seconds) after power up is required before the unit will operate normally. 942 fig.00-06.e Power For more information on the remote control button functions, refer to Using the Remote Control (p. 70). Power Indicator 17 u o Y e r o f e B i l g n y a P t r a t S Before You Start Playing To turn the power off, turn the [Volume] knob all the way to the left, and press the [Power] switch. fig.00-09.j The Power indicator at the left front of the KR107 will go dark, and the power will be turned off. Adjuster Adjusting the Sounds Volume and Brilliance Turn the [Volume] knob to adjust the overall volume. Turn the [Brilliance] knob to adjust the brightness of the sound. fig.00-07.e Min Max Mellow Bright Connecting Headphones The KR107 has two jacks for plugging in headphones. This allows two people to listen through headphones simultaneously, making it very useful for lessons and when performing piano pieces for four hands. Additionally, this allows you to play without having to worry about bothering others around you, even at night. Plug the headphones into the Phones jack located at the bottom left of the piano. Connecting headphones will automatically mute the sound from the internal speakers. The headphone volume is adjusted by the [Volume]
knob of the KR107. fig.00-04.e Phones jack x 2 NOTE Use Stereo headphones. 945 If you need to turn off the power completely, first turn off the POWER switch, then unplug the power cord from the power outlet. Refer to Power Supply
(p. 6). About the Pedals The pedals have the following functions, and are used mainly for piano performance. fig.00-08.e Soft Pedal Damper Pedal Sostenuto Pedal Damper pedal (right pedal) While this pedal is pressed, notes will be sustained even after you take your fingers off the keys. On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal will allow the remaining strings to resonate in sympathy with the sounds that you played from the keyboard, adding a rich resonance. The KR107 simulates this damper resonance. You can change the amount of resonance applied with the damper pedal. Please refer to [Piano Designer] button in the Quick Manual. Sostenuto pedal (center pedal) This pedal sustains only the sounds of the keys that were already played when you pressed the pedal. Soft pedal (left pedal) When you hold down this pedal and play the keyboard, the sound will have a softer tone. The softness of the sound changes subtly depending on the extent to which the pedal is depressed. About the Adjuster When you move the KR107 or if you feel that the pedals are unstable, adjust the adjuster located below the pedals as follows. Rotate the adjuster to lower it so that it is in firm contact with the floor. If there is a gap between the pedals and the floor, the pedals may be damaged. In particular when placing the instrument on carpet, adjust this so that the pedals firmly contact the floor. 18 S t a r t P a y n g l i B e f o r e Y o u Some Notes on Using Headphones To prevent damage to the cord, handle the headphones Some Notes on Using a Microphone Be careful of high volume levels when using microphone Before You Start Playing only by the headset or the plug. Connecting the headphones when the volume of connected equipment is turned up may result in damage to the headphones. Lower the volume on the KR107 before plugging in the headphones. Listening at excessively high volume levels will not only damage the headphones, but may also cause hearing loss. Use the headphones at a moderate volume level. Using the Headphone Hook Whenever you are not using the headphones, you can hang them on the headphone hook at the lower left of the KR107. Attaching the Headphone Hook Press and twist the headphone hook included with the KR107 into the hole in the bottom of the KR107 (refer to the figure below). Turn the headphone hook thumbscrew to secure the headphone hook. late at night or early in the morning. When connecting a microphone to the KR107, be sure to lower the volume. If the volume control is too high when the microphone is plugged in, noise may be produced by the speakers. Howling could be produced depending on the location of microphones relative to speakers. This can be remedied by:
1. Changing the orientation of the microphone(s). 2. Relocating microphone(s) at a greater distance from speakers. 3. Lowering volume levels. 983 About the Touch Screen The KR makes use of a touch screen. This lets you carry out a wide variety of actions just by touching the screen lightly. NOTE The touch screen is operated by touching it lightly with your finger. Pressing hard, or using a hard object can damage the touch screen. Be careful not to press too hard, and be sure to use only your fingers to operate the touch screen. Headphone Hook Connecting a Microphone You can connect a microphone into the Mic In jack, and enjoy karaoke with the KR107. fig.00-10 Mic Volume knob Mic In jack 1. 2. Connect a microphone (sold separately) to the Mic In jack on the lower-left area of the instrument. Rotate the [Mic Volume] knob on left side of the Mic In jack to adjust the volume level for the microphone. NOTE The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced due to changes in the surrounding environment and over time. If this happens, follow the steps in Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch Screen) (p. 149) to correct the pointer position. NOTE Do not place items on the touch screen. Adjusting the Contrast of the Screen To adjust the contrast of the screen, turn the Contrast knob located at the right side of the screen. 19 u o Y e r o f e B i l g n y a P t r a t S Before You Start Playing Main Screens Piano Screen Immediately after the power is turned on, the Piano screen like the one below is displayed. For details, refer to p. 21. NOTE When you select an internal song or music files that includes the lyrics data, this icon appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen. Touch this to display the lyrics. The explanations in this manual include illustrations that depict what should typically be shown by the display. Note, however, that your unit may incorporate a newer, enhanced version of the system
(e.g., includes newer sounds), so what you actually see in the display may not always match what appears in the manual. 985 The [Option] Button and The
[Exit] Button Basic Screen The following screen is called Basic screen. Tempo Song name or Music Style name Beat Measure The Tone names are selected appear. These information are displayed, when you use the automatic accompaniment. You can usually display this screen by pressing [Exit] button several times. Follow either of the procedures described below to display it. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. The Basic screen appears and the settings are made for automatic accompaniment. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, then press one of the Tone buttons, then press the [Exit] button. Using the Main Icons You can many other screens besides the Basic screen to do things. The on-screen graphics that appear three dimensional work like buttons. These are called Icons. The main icons you can use on these screens are as follows. Some screens consist on two or more pages. You can display the next page or the previous page of the screen by touching these icons. 20 The [Option] Button This displays a screen for advance function settings. The screen that opens differs depending on the screen that was displayed when the button was pressed. The [Exit] button Touch to cancel the settings currently being made and close the screen displayed. Normally, pressing the [Exit] button one or more times returns you to the Basic screen. The Scroll Bar and The Page Icon The Song and Tone selection screens feature a scroll bar at the right of the screen list, with page icons at the top and bottom of the scroll bar. Touch the scroll bar and drag up and down to scroll through the list. Touch the page icons to change pages. Chapter 1 Performance Playing the Keyboard Like a Piano
(One-Touch Piano) You can create the optimal settings for a piano performance with the press of a single button. fig.panel1-1 1 r e t p a h C 1. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. A Piano screen like the one shown below will appear. fig.d-piano.eps_60 Since this instrument faithfully reproduces real acoustic piano action and response, keys played in the top one-and-one-
half-octave range continue to resonate, regardless of the damper pedal action, and the tone in this range is audibly different. The Key Transpose setting (p. 87) can also be used to change the range that is unaffected by the damper pedal. When you press the One Touch Program [Piano] button, the KR will switch to the following settings, regardless of the current panel settings. If the keyboard has been split into upper and lower sections (p. 26), the keyboard returns to a single section. The pedals return to their usual functions (p. 18). The Grand Piano sound is automatically selected. The effect is automatically set to Damper Resonance (p. 35). You can change the piano performance settings by touching the [Piano Designer]
button. For more details, refer to [Piano Designer] Button in the Quick Start. When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data, <
appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen. Touch this to display the lyrics.
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected. You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones
(p. 30). 21 Chapter 1 Performance Performing with a Variety of Tones
(Tone Buttons) 1 r e t p a h C The KR comes with a many built-in instrument sounds and effects. This lets you enjoy perform in a wide range of musical styles. The built-in sounds are called Tones. The sounds are organized into six tone groups, which are assigned to the [Tone] buttons. fig.panel1-2 For more about the names of Tones, take a look at the Tone List (p. 170). 1. Press any one of the Tone buttons to select a tone group. Youll see that buttons indicator light up. The screen displays the tone names included in the tone group youve selected. fig.d-tonesel.eps_60 This screen is called the Tone selection screen. Tones indicated by recommended. is called an EX voice. These voices are especially Tones indicated by a red mark produce the Key Off Sound. What Key Off Sound does is recreate the tonal changes produced when the fingers are released from the keys. Tones indicated by GS is GS tones. Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and display other tones. Touch the page icons to change pages. You can touch <Audition> for an audio demonstration of a particular tone. You can touch <Effects> to add effect sounds to a variety of tones (p. 35). You can touch <Search> to find tones according to the search criteria you specify
(p. 24). 22 Chapter 1 Performance 2. Touch a tone name to select the tone. Youll hear the tone youve selected when you play the keyboard. You can use the dial to scroll through the screen as you switch the Tones to be played. 3. Press the [Exit] button. This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen. Playing Percussion Instruments or Sound Effects You can use the keyboard to play percussion sounds or effects like sirens and animal sounds. fig.panel1-2 1. Press the [Super Tones] button and watch the indicator light up. 2. Touch several times to display the Drums screen or the SFX screen. fig.d-drum.eps_60 C h a p t e r 1 Each note of the keyboard will play a different sound. You can also have play sounds by touching the screen. You can select other drum tones and effect sounds by pressing the < < > or < > >
buttons. 3. Press the [Exit] button several times. This returns you to the Basic screen or the previous screen. The combination of sounds assigned to the keyboard varies according to the drum set. Take a look at the Drum Set List (p. 172) and SFX Set List (p. 177). 23 Chapter 1 Performance Using Keywords to Search for Tones (Tone Search) You can search for tones that match the conditions you set for instrument or musical style. You can also search the tones using the first character of the tone name. 1 r e t p a h C 1. Press any Tone button. The tone selection screen appears. 2. Touch <Search>. The following Tone search screen appears. fig.d-tonesrch1.eps_60 Condition Search screen Name Search screen In condition search, tones satisfying all of the selected search criteria are sought. Touch here to switch these screens. Searching by Conditions 3. Touch <Category> or <Genre>, then use the dial to select the search conditions. 4. Touch <Search>. The search results appear in the display. Touch the tone name to select the tone. Press the [Exit] button to return to the tone search screen. Searching by Tone Name 3 Touch <By Name>. Touch <By Key> to go to the condition search screen. 4. Decide which character is to be used for the search. The selected character appears in the middle of the screen. Enter the character youre searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group (ABC...). Touching <A-0> selects the type of character. Each time you touch <A-0>, the character switches between alphabets and numerals. 5. Touch <Search>. The search results appear in the display. Touch the tone name to select the Tone. Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen. 24 Chapter 1 Performance Performing with Multiple Sounds Layered Together (Layer) Two tones sounding together when you press a single key is referred to as a layer performance. For instance, its possible to play the Tones for both Piano and Strings simultaneously. fig.layer.e C h a p t e r 1 Grand Piano 1 Strings 1 Strings 2 1. Touch <Layer 1> at the bottom of the Basic screen. fig.d-layer.eps_60 The tone that was sounding before you switched to layer performance, plus the tone indicated in the lower part of the display, are now played together. Here, the tone appearing in the upper part of the display is called the right-hand tone, and the tone appearing in the lower part of the display is called the layer tone. In the same manner, you can touch <Layer 2> to layer further sounds. Changing the tones 2. Touch the name of the tone to be changed. Touch here to highlight the tone name. 3. Press a Tone button to select the new tone (p. 22). 4. When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button. The display returns to the Basic screen. Cancelling the Layer 5. Touch <Layer 1>. Touch <Layer 2> to have <Layer 2> play as well. The <Layer 1> and <Layer 2> icons are dimmed, and the Layer performance is cancelled. Now when you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded. When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data, <
appears in the Basic screen. Touch this to display the lyrics.
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected. You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones
(p. 30). When you touch Octave
<-><+> on the tone selection screen, the pitch of the keyboards sound is changed in octave units. To learn more, see Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave Shift) (p. 27). You can change the balance of the right-hand and Layer Tone volume. For instructions, see Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part (Part Balance) (p. 62). 25 Chapter 1 Performance Playing Different Tones with the Left and Right Hands (Split) 1 r e t p a h C Dividing the keyboard into right-hand and left-hand areas, then playing different sounds in each section is called split performance. The boundary key is called the split point. The split point key is included in the left-hand keyboard area. Each time power to the keyboard is turned on, the split point is reset to F#3. fig.split.e Split Point Acoustic Bass Grand Piano 1 1. At the Basic screen, touch <Split>. fig.d-split.eps_60 The tone sounding prior to the split performance is played in the right-hand section of the keyboard, and the tone indicated at the left of the screen is played in the left-
hand section of the keyboard. Here, the tone appearing at the right part of the display is called the right-hand tone, and the tone appearing at the left part of the display is called the left-hand tone. Changing the Tones 2. Touch the name of the tone to be changed. 3. Press a Tone button to select the tone (p. 22). 4. When you have selected the tone, press the [Exit] button. The display returns to the Basic screen. Cancelling the Split 5. Touch <Split>.
+++++++++++++++++++++. When you play the keys, only the tone indicated on the screen is sounded. 26 You can change the split point;
refer to Changing the Keyboards Split Point (Split Point) (p. 138). When you select an internal song or music file that includes the lyrics data, <
appears in the Basic screen. Touch this to display the lyrics.
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected. You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones
(p. 30). When you touch Octave
<-><+> in the tone selection screen, the pitch of the keyboards sound is changed in octave units. To learn more, see Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps (Octave Shift) (p. 27). You can change the volume balance between the left- and right-hand parts of the keyboard; refer to Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part (Part Balance) (p. 62). Chapter 1 Performance Turning On Layer and Split Performance Simultaneously Turning on either Layer Performance or Split Performance allows you to divide the keyboard into a right-hand and a left-hand part and play with two Tones layered in the right-hand part. fig.d-layersplit.eps_60 When the keyboard has been divided into upper and lower sections, the damper pedal is applied to only the upper section. If you want to add lingering reverberations to the notes of the lower section, see Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User Functions) (p. 142). C h a p t e r 1 Shifting the Keyboard Pitch in Octave Steps
(Octave Shift) When using layer performance (p. 25) or split performance (p. 26), you can change the pitch of the keyboards sound in octave units. This function is called Octave Shift. For example, when using a layer performance, you can change the pitch of each sound and layer the sounds. You can make the pitch of the keyboards left-hand part match the pitch of the right-hand part during split performance. 1. On the Basic screen, touch <Layer> or <Split>. The KR switches to layer performance or split performance. 2. To apply Octave Shift, touch the name of the tone youve selected. 3. Press the Tone button to display the Tone selection screen. fig.d-octshift.eps_60 4. Touch Octave <-> or <+> in the lower part of the screen to adjust the pitch of the sound. Each time you touch <+>, the pitch is raised one octave. Each time you touch <->, the pitch is lowered one octave. The sound can be changed from two octaves lower than the original sound (-2) to two octaves above the original (+2). Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen. 27 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Reverberation to the Sound (Reverb) Apply a reverb effect to the notes you play with the KR. Reverb makes it sound as if you are playing in a concert hall. fig.panel1-3 1 r e t p a h C 1. Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the its indicator light up. A Reverb screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-reverb.eps_60 2. Touch an icon to select the performance space.
Display Hall 1 Hall 2 Room 1 Cathedral Ground Room 2 Lounge Studio Gymnasium Hall 3 Dome Cave GS Room 1 GS Room 2 GS Room 3 GS Hall 1 GS Hall 2 Explanation Hall with bright reverberation Hall with warm reverberation Room reverberation High-ceilinged cathedral Wide open space with no reverberations Small room Larger room A recording studio In a gymnasium Large concert hall reverberation A domed ballpark Adds the extended reverberations found inside a cave Reproduces an indoor-type reverb. Provides a clear, expansive reverberation. Reproduces the reverberation found in a hall. Gives reverberation with a greater sense of depth than GS Room. 28 Chapter 1 Performance Display GS Plate GS Delay GS Pan Delay Explanation Reproduces a plate echo (reverberation created using the vibrations of a metal plate). A delayed sound that is added to the original, similar to the reflected sounds of mountain echoes. The reflected sounds are panned (shifted) laterally. 3. Touch the slider beneath the icons to adjust the effect selected. Touch and slide the knob on the screen to the right for a deeper reverb, and to the left for less. You can also move the slider with the dial. When you press the [Exit] button, the reverb effect is activated, and you return to the previous screen. Cancelling the Effect 4. Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button, and watch the indicator light go out. The reverb effect is eliminated. No effect is applied when the slider is moved all the way to the left. In this case, the buttons indicator wont light up when you press the
[Ambience/Reverb] button. C h a p t e r 1 29 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Three-Dimensional Breadth to the Sounds You Play (Advanced 3D) 1 r e t p a h C You can add three-dimensional breadth to the sounds you play with automatic accompaniment (p. 46), or to internal songs or music files. With this effect, called Advanced 3D, you seem to be surrounded by the sound of the performance. fig.panel1-4 1. Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up. 2. Touch <Advanced 3D>. The following Advanced 3D screen appears. fig.d-adv3d.eps_60 ON OFF 3. Touch <ON>. Three-dimensional breadth is added to the sound. 4. Touch the icon to switch the effect on or off for each individual part. When you press the [Exit] button, the Advanced 3D effect is activated, and you return to the previous screen. Cancelling the Effect 5. Touch <OFF>. The Advanced 3D effect is eliminated, and the effect is no longer applied to any of the parts. 30
<*** > appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected. You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones
(p. 30).
> appears in the Piano
screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected. You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones
(p. 30). The Advanced 3D effect is not applied, even when you touch
<On>, if all parts are turned off. Chapter 1 Performance Making Detailed Settings for Advanced 3D 1. Press the [Ambience/Reverb] button and watch the indicator light up. 2. Touch <Advanced 3D>. 3. On the Advanced 3D screen, press the [Option] button. fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60 C h a p t e r 1 4. Touch for the parameter being set to select the value. Parameter Display Explanation Part Mode All Parts Layer Part Auto Speaker Headphone Depth Width 14 ON, OFF The effect is applied to all tones played with the keyboard (the left-hand tone, right-hand tone, and layer tone). The effect is applied only to the layer part. When not using a layer performance (p. 25), the Advanced 3D effect is not applied to the keyboard performance, even if <Keyboard> on the Advance 3D screen is set to On. This selects settings that are adjusted for use with headphones when headphones are connected. When no headphones are connected, settings adjusted for speakers are selected. Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through speakers are selected. Settings adjusted for listening to sounds through headphones are selected. Changes the apparent depth of the sound. The effect is applied more as the value is increased. Changes the breadth of the sound. You can also change the value with the dial. 5. When you press the [Exit] button, you return to the Advanced 3D screen. 31 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Liveliness to the Sound
(Dynamic Emphasis) You can add liveliness to the sound to give it superb clarity and distinctness. fig.panel2-8 1 r e t p a h C 1 Press the [Sound Control] button, to display the Sound Control screen. The Dynamic Emphasis function is switched on, enlivening the sound. fig.d-adv3dopt.eps_60 2 Touch the Type icon to select the type. Indicator Description Sharp Clear Power Creates a sound with boosted bass and treble. Produces a sound with chords in the low registers that are clear and distinct. Creates a sound with boosted bass. 3 Touch <Off> to cancel the Dynamics Emphasis function. 32 Chapter 1 Performance Adjusting the Sound to Achieve the Preferred Tone Quality (Equalizer) The KR features a built-in, five-band digital equalizer. An equalizer boosts or cuts specific sound pitches (frequency ranges) to adjust the sound balance for the overall performance. For example, you can boost the highs to get a crisper sound, or boost the low end for a more powerful sound. You can also adjust the sound to compensate for the acoustical characteristics of the performance space. If raising the slider for each frequency ends up distorting the sound, you can correct the distortion with the Master Level slider. 1. Press the [Sound Control] button, to display the Sound Control screen. 2. Touch <Equalizer>. The Equalizer screen appears. fig.d-eq.eps_60 3. Touch the Type icon to make your selection. Display Piano Power Mild Clear Bright Flat User Explanation The optimal settings for piano performance are selected. Boosts both the low- and high-frequency ranges. Lows and highs are restrained for a pleasant-sounding tone. This setting slightly boosts the midrange for a simple pop feeling. This setting boosts the high frequencies for a brilliant, sparkling sound. All slider values are set to 0. Store your own preferred settings (p. 34). 4. Touch the slider to make adjustment. Displayed Settings Value Low
-600+60 Explanation Low-frequency range. This is the range of frequencies for instruments like drums, bass, organ, guitar and strings. C h a p t e r 1 33 Chapter 1 Performance 1 r e t p a h C Displayed Mid Settings Value
-600+60
-600+60
-600+60 High
-600+60 Master Level
-600+60 Explanation Mid-low-frequency range. This is the range of frequencies for lower brass and woodwind instruments. Midrange. This is the range of frequencies where most instrument sounds are concentrated. Mid-high-frequency range. The ear is most sensitive to this frequency range. High-frequency range. These frequencies add brilliance to the sound. You can temper the distortion in the sound by lowering the level. Raising the level too much may cause the sound to become distorted. You can also move the slider with the dial. When you press the [Exit] button, the equalization is placed in effect, and you return to the previous screen. Cancelling the effect 5. Touch <Flat>. Storing the settings You can store adjusted equalizer settings to <User>. Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to call up your preferred settings. 1. Press the [Sound Control] button and watch the indicator light up. 2. Touch <Equalizer>. The Equalizer screen appears. 3. Adjust the equalizer. 4. Touch <Write>. The settings are stored. Even after editing the settings, you can touch <User> to select the stored settings. 34 C h a p t e r 1 Chapter 1 Performance Applying Effects to the Sound (Effects) You can apply a wide range of different effects to the notes you play on the keyboard. 1. First, press the Tone button to select a Tone (p. 22). For more on the effect types, refer to the Effects List (p. 176). The Tone selection screen appears. 2. Then, touch <Effects>. The Effect screen appears. fig.d-effects.eps_60 Applying effects to the sound 3. Touch <ON>. The effect selected with <Type> will be applied. Selecting the type of Effect 4. Touch <Type>
Setting the Effect to select the type of effect. The parameters that can be set change according to the type selected in Step 4. 5. Touch for the parameter being set to select the value. You can also move the slider with the dial. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Tone selection screen. Cancelling the Effect 6. On the Effects screen, touch <Off>. NOTE The effect is not applied to the layer tone or left-hand tone if the effect is different than that applied to the right-hand tone. Select the same effect. NOTE You may find effects not being applied to certain parts when different effects are applied to the right-hand tone, layer tone, and left-hand tone. In such instances, you can select which effect is to have priority. 35 Chapter 1 Performance Adding Effects to Mic Vocals
(Vocal Effect) 1 r e t p a h C With a microphone connected, you can add effects to the microphone vocals. Adding effects to the vocals is referred to as Vocal Effect. How to select Vocal Effect fig.panel1-5 For details on connecting a microphone, refer to Connecting a Microphone
(p. 22). 1. Press the [Vocal Effects] button. The Vocal Effects screen appears. fig.d-vocalsfx.eps_60 You can adjust the microphone volume with the Mic Volume knob on the (left) underside of the KR107. 2. Touch any one of the icons. Icon Echo Transformer Harmonist Vocal Count In Vocal Keyboard Music Files Explanation Page Adjusts the microphone echo. Alters the microphone vocals. Adds harmonies to the original voice. Allows you to start songs and Automatic Accompaniment using your own tempo. Allows you to produce sounds conforming to the vocal scale. You can play a specific part as harmony while playing back a song. p. 37 p. 37 p. 45 p. 39 p. 40 p. 41 3. When you press the [Exit] button, the effect is applied and you return to the previous screen. 36 Cancelling the Vocal Effect 4. Press the [Vocal Effects] button and watch the indicator light go out. The Vocal Effect function is cancelled. Adjusting the Echo (Echo) 1. Touch <Echo> in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect (p. 36). fig.d-vo-echo.eps_60 Chapter 1 Performance C h a p t e r 1 2. Touch the bar graph to adjust the amount of echo applied to the vocal. 3. Touch the Echo Type <1> or <2> to change the echo type. Displayed Explanation 1 2 Adds basic reverberations. Adds reverberations for a karaoke-type echo. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen. Altering Vocals (Transformer) You can modify the way your voice sounds through the microphone. This is called the Voice Transformer function. 1. Touch <Transformer> in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect (p. 36). fig.d-vo-trans.eps_60 When you use the Voice Transformer function, the resonance setting for the piano
(see p. 152) may sometimes be reset. 37 Chapter 1 Performance 2. Touch any one of the icons. Heres what the different icons do. 1 r e t p a h C Display Kids Bear Robot Duck Alien Computer Female Male Explanation Transforms the input into the sound of a childs voice. Transforms the input sound into the voice of a large animal. Transforms the input into the sound of a robots voice. Transforms the input into a ducks quacking sound. Transforms the input into an alien voice. Transforms the input into a voice like that from a computer. Transforms male voices into female voices. Transforms female voices into male voices. 3. Sing through the microphone. Your voice is transformed according to the item you selected. Cancelling the Effect 4. Once again, touch the icon you selected in Step 2. The Voice Transformer effect is eliminated. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen. Adding Harmonies (Harmonist) You can sing with a harmony accompaniment, even when youre playing solo. This is called the Harmonist function. 1. Touch <Harmonist> in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect (p. 36). Touch fig.d-vo-harmo.eps_60 to switch the screen. 38 Chapter 1 Performance 2. Touch any one of the icons. Heres what the different icons do. Display My Voice Duo1 Duo2 Variety Trio Chord Unison Oct-Up Oct-Down 5th Up 3rd Up 4th Down Explanation The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony. The harmony is added to your voice regardless of the pitch. The added harmony matches the chords specified on the keyboard. Adding harmony to a single voice gives the effect of two people singing together. The melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony. The harmony added is matched to the pitch; for example, higher pitches are used for female voices, lower pitches for male voices. The added harmony matches the chords specified on the keyboard. This adds a two-voice harmony that makes it seem that a trio is singing. The added harmony matches the chords specified on the keyboard. You can change the way harmonies are added with the Melody Intelligence type (p. 59). Sounds like two people singing the same melody. Adds another voice one octave higher than the original. Adds another voice one octave lower than the original. Adds harmony a fifth above the original. Adds harmony a third above the original. Adds harmony a major fourth below the original. Cancelling the Effect 3. Touch the Harmonist type you selected in Step 2 again. The Harmonist function is cancelled. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen. Enabling the start of songs and automatic accompaniment with the sound of your voice (Vocal Count-In) You can start songs and the Automatic Accompaniment by counting into the microphone. 1. Touch <Vocal Count In> in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect (p. 36). fig.d-vo-coin.eps_60 C h a p t e r 1 39 Chapter 1 Performance 2. Touch <Arranger> or <Song>. Display Arranger Song Explanation Automatic Accompaniment starts at the tempo used for the count. The song starts at the tempo used for the count. 3. Count to four (One, two, three, four) into the mic. 1 r e t p a h C Count out the number of beats per measure in the time signature of the selected song or Music Style. For example, if you select a time signature of 4/4, then count to four; count to three when 3/4 time is selected. The tempo is automatically set according to the interval between the counts as you speak into the microphone, and the song or Arranger begins. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Vocal Effects screen. Playing instrument sounds at vocal pitches (Vocal Keyboard) You can have melodies sung into the microphone played with the KRs internal Tones. 1. Touch <Vocal Keyboard> in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect (p. 36). fig.d-vo-key.eps_60 2. If the <OFF> icon is selected, touch the <ON> icon. 3. Touch any of the icons to select a Tone. You can also select the Tone by pressing the Tone button. When you sing into the microphone, the sung pitches are played using the selected Tone. When you play the keys while using Vocal Keyboard, the tone selected for Vocal Keyboard is played. Cancelling the effect 4. Touch <OFF>. The Vocal Keyboard function is cancelled. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen. 40 Adding harmonies to a specified part (Music Files) When you sing while playing back a specified part from song data, harmony is added based on pitches of the specified part. 1. Select the song to which you want to add harmony. To select a song stored in external memory, connect the external memory to the external memory port. 2. Touch <Music Files> in Step 2 of How to select Vocal Effect (p. 36). fig.d-vo-music.eps_60 Chapter 1 Performance C h a p t e r 1 3. Touch the icon for the part to which you want to add harmony. When you play back the song and sing into the mic, harmonies are added using the pitches of the specified part. 4. Touch <Variety>. When <Variety> is ON, the melody played on the keyboard is played as the harmony. The harmony added is matched to the pitch. Cancelling the effect 5. Touch the icon you selected in Step 3 again. The Music Files function is cancelled. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Vocal Effects screen. 41 Chapter 1 Performance Enjoying Karaoke Performances with Music Files 1. Connect a microphone. 2. Adjust the volume level and the amount of echo applied. On the KR, use the Vocal Effect function to adjust the echo (p. 37). You can also enjoy this effect with the Voice Transformer function (p. 37) and Harmonist function (p. 38, 45). 1 r e t p a h C Commercial music files designed for karaoke sing-
along are also available. Consult your KR dealer when purchasing music files. Refer to Music Files That the KR Can Use (p. 183). 3. Select a song. To select a song stored in external memory, connect the external memory to the external memory port. For instructions on how to select songs, refer to Playing a Song (p. 64). 4. Adjust the tempo as required with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons. 5. If necessary, change the key of the song (p. 87). When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the accompaniment starts playing. Sing along with the accompaniment. When you play back a Music File with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen. 6. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop the accompaniment. On the KR, lyrics can also be shown on an external display. Refer to Connecting an External Display (p. 23) and Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays (User Image Display) (p. 146). You can stop lyrics from being displayed. Refer to Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics) (p. 153). 42 Using the Metronome The KR features a built-in metronome. During playback of the song and accompaniment, the metronome plays at that tempo and beat. fig.panel1-6 Chapter 1 Performance During playback of a song, or when performing with automatic accompaniment, the sound of the metronome keeps time with the beat of the song or accompaniment. C h a p t e r 1 Using the Metronome 1. Press the [Metronome] button and watch the indicator light up. You will hear the metronome. The following Metronome screen appears. fig.d-metro.eps_60 You can press the [Exit] button to have the metronome continue to play while you return to the previous screen. Stopping the metronome 2. Press the [Metronome] button once more, and the indicator light goes out. 43 Chapter 1 Performance Changing the Metronome Settings Adjusting the tempo You can adjust the tempo of the metronome. The tempo of the metronome changes automatically if you use an Automatic Accompaniment or play back a song. 1. Press the Tempo [-] or [+] buttons to adjust a tempo. 1 r e t p a h C You can adjust the metronome tempo over a range of
= 10500. Pressing the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected song accompaniment to the basic tempo. Changing the beat of the metronome 1. On the Metronome screen, touch <Beat>. 2. Select the beat with the dial. When only the upbeat will sound. is selected, Changing the volume The volume of the metronome can be adjusted to ten different levels. 1. On the Metronome screen, touch <Volume>. 2. Select the volume with the dial. Choosing it to the highest level. sets the volume to the lowest level, and choosing sets Choose to silence the metronome sound. Changing the Type of Sound You can change the sound the metronome makes. The setting is at normal metronome sound when the KR is powered up. 1. On the Metronome screen, touch <Sound>. 2. Select the sound with the dial. Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation Normal metronome sound Electronic metronome sound 1, 2, 3 in Japanese 1, 2, 3 in English 44 Chapter 1 Performance Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation Dog and cat sounds Wood block Triangle and castanet Hand clap Changing how the metronome beat (pattern) sounds You can set the Metronome to play at even smaller intervals. 1. On the Metronome screen, touch <Pattern>. 2. Select the pattern with the dial. Displayed Explanation Displayed Explanation Usual sound Dotted half-note intervals Half-note intervals Quarter-note intervals Dotted quarter-note intervals Dotted eighth-note intervals Eighth-note intervals Sixteenth-note intervals Single back beat added Triplet rhythm added Shuffle rhythm added Turning Off the Beat Light (Beat Indicator) The beat light flashes in time with the metronome, accompaniment Styles, and song tempos, but you can set it so that it stays off at all times. 1. Touch <Beat Indicator> in the Metronome screen. 2. Select On/Off (Beat Indicator off) with the dial. C h a p t e r 1 45 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment For instructions on playing the Automatic Accompaniment, refer to Selecting Music Styles
(Music Style Buttons) (p. 50). Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment 2 r e t p a h C What is Automatic Accompaniment?
Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button for Automatic Accompaniments optimum settings. Automatic Accompaniment is a function that provides you with accompaniment in a variety of musical genres, just by specifying chords in the left hand. Automatic Accompaniment lets you play with an orchestra, even when performing alone!
What Are Music Styles?
Accompaniment patterns in various musical genres are called Music Styles. There are many different kinds of music around the world, and each has its own unique features. What gives jazz or classical music their unmistakable sounds are a unique combination of elements like instrumentation, melody, and phrasing, which interact to create the musical character. Elements of Music Styles A Music Style consists of a set of six sections called divisions. Division Intro Original Variation Fill In To Original Fill In To Variation Ending Explanation Played at the start of a song. The basic accompaniment pattern. This is a variation on the Original accompaniment pattern. This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the mood changes and the accompaniment returns to the original. This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a point where the mood changes and the accompaniment moves ahead to the variation. The conclusion of a song. In addition, Music Styles are built from: Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4, Accompaniment 5, and Accompaniment 6. 46 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Performing Using Automatic Accompaniment
(One-Touch Arranger) Heres how to create the settings for Automatic Accompaniment. fig.panel2-1 1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. The Basic screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60 Observe the settings:
The keyboard is split into left- and right-hand parts, with accompaniment chords specified for the left-hand side of the keyboard. A tone appropriate for the selected Music Style is chosen. The tempo and beat for the selected Music Style is set. 2. Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard. The accompaniment begins, starting from the intro. Play chords with the left hand, and the melody with the right. When you change chords in the left hand, the accompaniment also changes. fig.arr-split.e F 3 Split Point ( ) The range specifyed a chord 3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. After the ending plays, the accompaniment stops. C h a p t e r 2
<*** > appears in the Piano screen or Basic screen when headphones are connected. You can add three-
dimensional breadth to the sound from the headphones
(p. 33). Normally, when you change a Music Style, the tempo and tone change to selections that go well with the selected Music Style. If you do not want to change the tempo and tone, refer to Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo (One Touch Setting) (p. 138). For instructions on selecting Music Styles, refer to Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons) (p. 50). For instructions on starting and stopping the accompaniment, refer to Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment (p. 54). You can change the range in which chords are played. Please refer to Changing the Keyboards Split Point (Split Point) (p. 138). 47 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment About Chords A chord is produced when several notes are played simultaneously. Chords are indicated by the pitch of the fundamental note of the chord (the root) and the chord type, which is determined by the other notes of the chord. For example, the C m chord is expressed in terms of the root note C and the chord type m (minor). C m is made up of the three notes C, E and G. C m is indicated as the chord name on the Basic screen. 2 r e t p a h C fig.chord.e C m Chord Type Root Note E C G Root Note All chord roots are indicated as a letter, sometimes with correspond to the notes shown below. or added, and fig.chord-root.e Playing Chords with Simple Fingering
(Chord Intelligence) Chord Intelligence is a feature that chooses the accompaniment chords the moment you play a key. To play a C chord, for example, you normally have to play the three keys C, E, and G. But with Chord Intelligence, you only have to press the C key to start a C chord accompaniment. fig.chord-intel.e Intelligence 1 Major Ex:
C Minor Ex:
C m Play the chord root. Play the root and the third key above it. Seventh C 7 Ex:
Play the root and the second key above it. Minor Seventh Ex:
C m7 Play the root, the third key above it, and the second key below it. Major Seventh Ex:
C maj 7 Play the root and the first key below it. Diminished Ex:
C dim Play the root and the sixth key above it. Normally, settings used for the Chord Intelligence function are selected, but there may be settings that are not used. You can also change the rules governing how chords are played. For more information, see Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified
(Arranger Config) (p. 138). For more information about chord fingering, refer to the Chord List (p. 178). 48 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Viewing Chord Fingerings (Chord Finder) Whenever you are not sure how a certain chord is fingered, you can display the notes of the chord on the screen. 1. On the Basic screen, touch <
>. fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60 2. Touch the root of the chord you want to learn about. The chord fingering appears on screen. fig.d-crdfind.eps_60 For example, if you wanted to see the fingering for a C# chord, you would touch
<C>, then touch <#>. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Basic screen. C h a p t e r 2 49
1 | USERS MANUAL 2 | Users Manual | 2.55 MiB | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 |
Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Selecting Music Styles (Music Style Buttons) You can select a variety of different Music Styles by pressing the Music Style buttons. Four different preset styles are assigned to the Music Style. fig.panel2-2 2 r e t p a h C 1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. 2. Press one of the Music Style buttons to select the Music Style group. Watch the indicator button light up. Five of the Music Styles included in that group are displayed on the screen. fig.d-stylesel.eps_60 For more on the Music Style names, refer to the Music Style List (p. 177, p. 193). This screen is called the Style Selection screen. Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and display other styles. Touch the page icons to change pages. You can listen to the Music Style by touching <Audition>. You can touch <Search> to find Styles that match the selected criteria (p. 52). 3. Touch a Music Style name to select the Music Style. You can use the dial to automatically switch pages and select Styles. 4. Touch Preset <A>, <B>, <C>, or <D> in the lower part of the screen. When the Music Style is selected, Preset A is selected. When any of the Presets from <A> through <D> are selected, the Music Style tempo, right-hand Tone, Style Orchestrator settings (p. 58) and other settings change. 50 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment 5. Press the [Exit] button. The display returns to the Basic screen. When you play a chord in the left-hand part of the keyboard, the selected Music Style is automatic. Selecting Music Styles on External Memories You can play other User Styles saved to external memories or User memory (p. 134). fig.panel2-3 C h a p t e r 2 1. Press the Music Style [User] button. fig.d-styldisk.eps_60 2. Touch <User> in the lower part of the screen. When you touch <User> on the lower part of the screen, the screen for selecting user memory or disk Styles appears. When you touch <Preset>, the screen for selecting Trad/Kids Music Styles appears. 3. Touch < ** > < ** > to select the storage media to which the accompaniment Style is saved. The names of the accompaniment styles stored on the selected storage media are displayed. 4. Select a Music Style, and touch the Music Style name. 5. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. You can now perform in the selected Music Style. Music Styles selected from external memories are stored until the power is turned off. Even after ejecting the external memory, by pressing the Music Style [User]
button, you can perform using the most recently selected Music Style. You can save multiple user Styles to user memory. Take a look at Saving a User Style
(p. 134). 51 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Using Keywords to Search for Music Styles
(Style Search) You can search for Music Styles that match the tempo of the song, musical genre, or other criteria you set. You can also search Music Styles using the first character of the Style names. 1. Press one of the Music Style buttons. 2. Touch <Search>. The following Style Search screen appears. fig.d-stylsrch1.eps_60 Condition Search screen Name Search screen 2 r e t p a h C Only the KRs internal Music Styles are searchable. Touch here to switch these screens. Searching by Conditions 3. Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the [-] [+] buttons and the In a condition search, the KR looks for Music Styles satisfying all of the selected search criteria. dial to select the search conditions. 4. Touch <Search>. The search results appear in the display. Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style Search screen. Searching by Music Style name 3. Touch <By Name>. Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen. 4. Decide which character youll use for the search. The selected character appears in the middle of the screen. Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(ABC...). Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals. 5. Touch <Search>. The search results appear on the display. Touch a Music Style name to select a Music Style. Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen or the previous screen. 52 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing Only Music Style Rhythm Patterns You can also play only the rhythm patterns of Music Styles. fig.panel2-4 1. Select a Music Style (p. 50). 2. Press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. The performance is set so that only the rhythm patterns are played. 3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. The Rhythm part of accompaniment begins, starting from the Intro. Just as with regular Automatic Accompaniment, you can add intros and endings by pressing the [Intro/Ending] button, and make changes to the rhythm patterns with the Fill In button (p. 57). Adjusting the Accompaniment Tempo fig.panel2-5 C h a p t e r 2 NOTE Some Music Styles do not include rhythm patterns. When you select these Style patterns, no rhythm patterns are played, even when you play on the left side of the keyboard. When the Basic screen is displayed, you can use the Tempo [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the tempo. The tempo is indicated on the upper left of the screen. fig.d-arrbasic.eps_60 Pressing the Tempo [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song to the basic tempo. You can change the tempo of Automatic Accompaniment even while the accompaniment is playing. 53 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Starting and Stopping the Accompaniment Pressing the One Touch Program [Arranger] button activates Sync Start for the accompaniment (which starts the accompaniment simultaneously when you play on the lower section of the keyboard), and automatically sets an appropriate intro for the accompaniment. You can also change the way the accompaniment starts and stops. fig.panel2-6 2 r e t p a h C Having the Accompaniment Start Simultaneously When You Play the Keyboard (Sync) 1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously, causing the indicators of both buttons to flash. The Sync Start settings go into effect. 2. Play a chord on the lower-part of keyboard. As you play the keys, the intro and accompaniment begins simultaneously. Changing the intro When set for Sync Start (the indicators of both the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/
Stop] button are flashing), you can use the following procedure to change the intro, or prevent the intro from playing. Starting without an intro Press the [Intro/Ending] button and watch the indicator go out. Now when you play a chord with the keyboard, the accompaniment starts without the intro. To start with a short intro added Touch <Arranger> in the Basic screen to open the arranger screen. Touch the Intro <2>. fig.d-intro2.eps_60 Now when you specify a chord with the keyboard, a short intro is played, and the accompaniment starts. 54 Sync Start is set immediately after the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button is pressed. Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Starting at the press of a button 1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button and [Start/Stop] button simultaneously, and the indicators lights go out. The Sync Start function is cancelled. 2. Play a chord on the lower part of keyboard. Choose the chord to be played when the accompaniment begins playing. 3. Press the [Intro/Ending] button or the [Start/Stop] button. When you press the [Intro/Ending] button, the intro plays, and the accompaniment starts. When you press the [Start/Stop] button, the accompaniment starts without the intro. When you touch Intro <2> on the Basic screen, a short intro plays. C h a p t e r 2 Chord Tones and Bass Tones When you play the keys in the left-hand side of the keyboard while the [Start/Stop]
buttons indicator is not lit, chords play. This note is called the Chord Tone, and the root of the chord being played at the same time is called the Bass Tone. You can change the sound of the chord tone and bass tone. Take a look at Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified (Arranger Config)
(p. 138). Stopping Automatic Accompaniment Stopping with an added ending 1. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. An ending plays and the Automatic Accompaniment stops. Stopping at the same time the button is pressed 1. Press the [Start/Stop] button. The Automatic Accompaniment stops as soon as you press the button. 55 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro (Countdown) If an intro plays before your performance, you can have a count-in sound played to the end of the intro, helping you hear when to start playing. fig.countdown.e Ex: 4/4 Intro When the Intro has finished playing, the accompaniment plays. 2 r e t p a h C 1 2 3 4 Count Sound 1. Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up. The following Countdown settings screen appears. fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60 2. Touch <Count Mode>
to set this to Count Down. When you press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button, the performance starts, and the countdown sound plays at the end of the intro. Cancelling the countdown 3. Press the [Count/Marker] button and the indicator light goes out. For more about settings on the Countdown screen, refer to Settings for the Countdown
(p. 161). 56 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Modifying an Accompaniment When you use Automatic Accompaniment, you can easily add Fill Ins to the accompaniment patterns, change arrangements, and make other changes. Changing the Accompaniment Pattern
(Fill In Buttons) There are two accompaniment patterns: the Original, and a Variation. In addition, a fill-in (or short phrase) is added at the points where the accompaniment patterns change, which adds more interest to the song. It can be effective to use the simpler original pattern for the first half of the song, and the variation pattern for the second half. You can add variation to the Automatic Accompaniment by assigning different functions to the Performance Pads and pedals. For more information, see Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User Functions) (p. 142). C h a p t e r 2 Whats a Fill In?
A short improvisational phrase inserted at the bar line is called a Fill In. The KR automatically plays the appropriate phrase for the selected Music Style. fig.panel2-7 Press the Fill In [Variation] button and watch the indicator light up. The instrument is set so that the variation performance pattern is played. Press the Fill In [Original] button and watch the indicator light up. The instrument is set so that the original performance pattern is played. Pressing these buttons during a performance inserts a one-bar fill-in at the appropriate place and time. Adding a fill-in without changing the accompaniment pattern You can play only the fill-in, without changing the accompaniment pattern. Press the lit [Original] or [Variation] Fill In button during the performance. 57 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Changing Accompaniment Patterns in the Screen You can change accompaniment patterns in intros, fill-ins, endings, and so on by touching the screen. This lets you enjoy even more advanced performances. 1. Press the One Touch [Automatic Accompaniment] button. The Automatic Accompaniment basic screen is displayed. 2. Touch <Arranger>. The following screen appears. fig.d-cntdwn.eps_60 2 r e t p a h C Touch the screen to change the accompaniment pattern. Changing the Instrumental Makeup of Music Styles
(Style Orchestrator) You can change the arrangement of an accompaniment. This function is called Style Orchestrator. Each Music Style has four different accompaniment arrangements. fig.panel2-8 1. Press the [Style Orchestrator] button and watch the indicator light up. The instrument is set to allow you to change the arrangement with the Performance Pads. 2. Press Performance Pad [1][3] to change the arrangement for the accompaniment. Watch the indicator of the button you pressed light up. 1 2 3 58 Display Explanation This is the simplest arrangement. This is a more involved arrangement. This is the most elavorate arrangement. When you press the [Phrase]
button or [User Function]
buttons, the [Style Orchestrator] buttons indicator goes out, and the function of the Performance Pads changes. For details refer to p. 72 and p. 142. NOTE When simple Music Styles are selected, there may be no change in the arrangement even when you use the Style Orchestrator function. Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Adding Harmony to the Right-Hand Part (Melody Intelligence) You can add harmony to the notes you play on the keyboard. While an Automatic Accompaniment is playing, the matching harmony is automatically added to the notes you are playing with the right hand. This function is called Melody Intelligence. fig.panel2-10 C h a p t e r 2 1. Press the [Melody Intelligence] button and watch the indicator light up. When you play something on the right-hand section of the keyboard, harmony is added. The following Melody Intelligence screen appears. fig.d-melointel.eps_60 2. Select and touch a harmony type. Then when you play a melody on the keyboard, a harmony style is automatically added. When you press the [Exit] button, youre returned to the previous screen, while the Melody Intelligence function remains selected. 3. Press the [Melody Intelligence] button once more and the indicator light goes out. The Melody Intelligence function is cancelled. With some harmonies, Tones may change automatically. Also, when you play several keys at the same time, in some cases harmony may be added to one note. 59 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing Sounds in the Left Hand During a Performance (Lower Tone) Normally, when using Automatic Accompaniment in a performance, sounds are not produced by playing the left-hand part of the keyboard. When you touch the
<Lower 1> or <Lower 2> icon, you can have Tones from the left side of the keyboard play simultaneously with the Automatic Accompaniment. 2 r e t p a h C 1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. This sets the Automatic Accompaniment. 2. On the Basic screen, touch <Lower 1>. Now when you play a chord in the left-hand keyboard area, the notes you play will sound, and the accompaniment chord changes. In the same manner, you can play the left-hand tone by touching <Lower 2>. By touching both <Lower 1> and <Lower 2>, you can get a Layer performance for the left-hand. fig.d-lower.eps_60 Stopping the sound in the left-hand 3. Touch <Lower 1>. The <Lower> icon returns to the original color. To have <Left 2> play as well, also touch <Left 2>. The left-hand Tones stop playing. 60 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Playing the Piano with Accompaniment Added
(Piano Style Arranger) Usually with Automatic Accompaniment, you play chords on the left-hand side of the keyboard and the melody on the right-hand side. Chords can also be recognized over the entire keyboard, allowing you to perform using Automatic Accompaniment without splitting the keyboard. This function is called Piano Style Arranger. This makes it possible to add an accompaniment automatically as you play a song by playing chords in the ordinary way, without giving any thought to the location of a keyboard split. 1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. 2. Touch <Split> to turn the Split function off. fig.d-pianist.eps_60 3. Select a Music Style (p. 50). 4. Play the keyboard. The accompaniment starts when you play a chord anywhere on the keyboard. C h a p t e r 2 61 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Part (Balance) You can adjust the volume balance between the accompaniment and the keyboard, and the volume balance for each of the parts in a Music Style. 2 r e t p a h C Changing the Volume Balance between the Accompaniment and the Keyboard (Balance Knob) You can change the volume balance between a song and accompaniment and the notes you play on the keyboard. 1. Adjust the volume balance with the Balance knob. fig.volbal.e Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part (Part Balance) You can adjust the volume of each performance part in a Music Style, and the balance between parts when playing multiple Tones on the keyboard. fig.panel2-11 NOTE When this knob is turned completely to the Accompaniment side, no sounds from the keyboard are audible, even when the keys are pressed. You can usually leave the knob at the center position. 1. Press the [Part Balance] button and watch the indicator light up. The following Part Balance screen appears. Touch fig.d-partbal2.eps_60 to switch the screens. Switch the screens 62 Chapter 2 Automatic Accompaniment The volume balance between the performance parts in the Music Style is indicated. Display Performance part Rhythm Bass Accomp Music Style Rhythm Part Bass Tone (p. 55) Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, Accompaniment 3, Chord Tone (p. 55) This shows the volume balance between the keyboards Tones when either layer performance (p. 25) or split performance (p. 26) are used, or the volume balance when using the keyboard to play percussion instruments or sound effects (p. 23). fig.d-partbal1.eps_60 Switch the screens Displayed Tone Part Drums Lower 1 Lower 2 Layer 1 Layer 2 Upper Percussion instruments or sound effects played with the keys Left-hand Tone 1 Left-hand Tone 2 Layer Tone 1 Layer Tone 2 Right-hand Tone C h a p t e r 2 63 Chapter 3 Song Playback Playing a Song Now, lets try practicing while playing back internal songs, commercial music files, and songs saved to floppy disks. You can use rewind or fast-forward to go to any desired measure, and play back from that point. You can also play audio files. fig.panel3-1 Record/Playback buttons C h a p t e r 3 Selecting the song When playing back songs on optional external memory, first connect the external memory to the external memory port. 1. Press the [Song] button. The following Song Selection screen appears. fig.d-songsel.eps_60 Touch and drag up and down in the scroll bar to scroll through the screen and display other songs. Touch the page icons to change pages.
: The fingering is included in the score.
: The chords are indicated in the score.
: You can display song lyrics.
: For audio files. When you touch <
>, songs selected from all of the internal songs are played in random order. When you touch <
>, all of the songs in the genre you have selected are played in order, starting from the selected song. When the last song is finished, playback resumes from the initial song.
>: The selected song is played back. This changes to <
> while the song is played back; playback stops when you touch <
>. 64 By touching the [Setting] button, you can then view information about the song (p. Chapter 3 Song Playback 153) and save songs to external memory (p. 101).
>: The song genre changes. 2. Touch the name of the song to be played back. You use and the dial to select songs. Playing back 3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. The button indicator lights up, and playback of the song begins. Stopping the Song 4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button once again. The button indicator light goes out, and the song stops. When the song is finished, playback stops automatically. Press the [
(Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song. Record/Playback Buttons fig.composer.e Track buttons:
Each performance part of the song being played back is assigned to a track button. Use these buttons to select the performance parts that are muted or played. For more detailed information, refer to p. 83.
(Reset)] button: Returns to the beginning of the song.
(Play/Stop)] button:
Plays back the song, or if the song is currently being played, it stops the song.
(Rec)] button: Records the performance. For more detailed information, refer to p. 89.
(Bwd)] button: Moves back the playback position of the song one measure each time the button is pressed. Moves back the playback position of the song one second each when an audio file is being played back. When held down, the song rewinds continuously.
(Fwd)] button: Advances the playback position of the song one measure each time the button is pressed. Advances the playback position of the song one second each when an audio file is being played back. When held down, the song is forwarded continuously. Holding down the [
you to the end of the song.
(Play/Stop)] button and pressing the [
(Fwd)] button moves If there is recorded song data, the Delete song screen appears. If its okay to delete the song, touch <OK>. If you do not want to delete the song, touch
<Cancel>, and either save the song to a floppy disk (p. 101) or register the song to the Favorites (p. 68). C h a p t e r 3 NOTE When you start playback of songs, the measure number on the Basic screen appears in reverse video. The performance data is being loaded while the indication is highlighted; please wait a few moments for this to be completed. NOTE When using markers to specify a section to be repeated (p. 86), you can rewind and fast forward only within the range between Marker A and Marker B. 65 Chapter 3 Song Playback When Selecting Songs in Folders 1. Touch the folder name. 2. Touch <
> at the bottom left of the screen. After a moment, a list of songs in the folder is displayed. You can also use the remote controls [
(Bwd)] [
(Fwd)] buttons and dial to select songs, then press [
(PLAY)] button to open the folder. 3. Touch a song from the list that appears to select the song you want to play back.
* Depending on the number of songs contained in a folder, this may take some time. About Audio Files Audio files in the following format can be played back:
.WAV extension 16bit linear Sampling rate of 44.2 kHz Stereo You cannot use the following functions in playing back audio files. Marker (p.**) Displaying lyrics (p.**) Registering Favorites (p.**) Transposing (p.**) Changing tempos (p.**) Track Mute (p. **) Recording (p.**) Search (p.**)
* Saving or performing other procedures during playback of audio files may cause the song to stop while it is playing. 3 r e t p a h C 66 Chapter 3 Song Playback Using Keywords to Search for Songs (Song Search) You can search for songs that match the conditions you set regarding the song tempo or genre. You can also search the songs using the first character of the song name. 1. Press the [Song] button. 2. Touch <Search>. The following Song Search screen appears. fig.d-songsrch1.eps_60 Condition Search screen Name Search screen Only the KRs internal songs are searchable. Searching by conditions Touch here to switch these screens. 3. Touch the parameter you want to set, then use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to select the search conditions. With <Data>, songs are searched according to data included in the internal songs. You can use four different criteria in searches: Chords, Lyrics, Fingering
(fingering numbers), and Any. By selecting a song containing any of this data, then displaying it in the KRs notation, you can display information about the selected data. 4. Touch <Search>. The search results appear in the display. Touch the song name to select the song. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song Selection screen. Searching by song name 3. Touch <By Name>. Touch <By Key> to return to the Condition Search screen. 4. Decide which character you will use for the search. The selected character appears in the middle of the screen. Enter the character you are searching for. For example, touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(ABC...). Touch <A-0> to toggle between alphabets and numerals. 5. Touch <Search>. The search results appear in the display. Touch the song name to select the song. Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the previous screen. C h a p t e r 3 67 Chapter 3 Song Playback Registering the Songs You Like (Favorites) You can register songs you are currently practicing or enjoy playing to Favorites, allowing you to select these songs easily. Selecting the Song 1. Press the [Select/Listen to a Song] button. The Song Selection screen appears (p. 64). 2. Touch the song name to select the song to be registered. Registering to Favorites 3. Touch <Add>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.m-fvrtadd.eps_60 3 r e t p a h C 4. Touch <OK>. The selected song is registered to Favorites. Now you can select the registered song by selecting Favorites for the genre in the Song Selection screen. You can also register songs on external memory to the Favorites. For details, refer to Copying Songs on External Memories to Favorites (p. 105). You cannot register audio files to the Favorites. 68 Chapter 3 Song Playback Removing Songs from Favorites This deletes registered songs for Favorites. 1. In the Song Selection screen, select Favorites for the genre. fig.d-song-fvrt.eps_60 2. Touch the name of the song to be deleted. 3. Touch <Del>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.m-fvrtdel.eps_60 4. Touch <OK>. The song is deleted. C h a p t e r 3 69 Chapter 3 Song Playback Using the Remote Control You can use the included remote control to easily start and stop performances and switch songs.
+++. How to Use the Remote Control When using the remote control, aim the remote control at the infrared receiver, keeping in mind the range of operation (below). 3 r e t p a h C Infrared Receiver Range of operation Distance:
4 m (approximately 13 feet) Angle:
30 degrees to the left and right of the receiver. Remote Control Information from the remote is not received when Remote Sensor setting is switched off. Refer to p. 152. Precautions Concerning Use of the Remote Control The remote control is able to transmit only one operation at a time. The remote control may not operate even within the range of operation if there is an obstacle between it and the main unit. Using the remote control near other equipment that uses remote control systems may result in operational errors. The life of the battery depends on the amount and conditions of use. If the operational range of the remote control decreases, change the batteries. If you will not be using the remote control for a long period of time, remove the batteries. The remote's response may suffer if the remote's sensor is situated under spotlights or exposed to other such strong lighting. 70 About the Remote Control Infrared Emitter 1 Adding Effects to Mic Vocals 2 3 4 5 Turning the Advanced 3D Function or Surround Function On and Off Selecting the Song Genre Muting the Sound Using the Function Assigned to the [FUNC]
Button Chapter 3 Song Playback Restoring the Original TONE, HARMONY, and TRANSFORM Settings Selecting the Tone for the Left-Hand and Right-Hand Tracks Switching the Screen of the External Display Starting and Stopping Songs, Selecting Previous and Following Songs 6 7 8 9 10 Changing the Volume 11 12 Changing the Tempo of the Song and Automatic Accompaniment Transposing Sounds from the Keyboard and Songs Being Played Back C h a p t e r 3 You can also switch the functions for the [
[FUNC 2] button, the TEMPO [-] [+] button, and the TRANSPOSE [-] [+] button. Please refer to Changing the Functions of the Remote Controls Buttons (p. 148).
] (Play/Stop) button, the [FUNC 1]
71 Chapter 3 Song Playback 3 r e t p a h C 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 Button TRANSFORM HARMONY 3D INTERNAL FAVORITES EXTERNAL MUTE FUNC1, FUNC2 CANCEL TONE DISPLAY Explanation This changes the vocals from the mic. The setting switches each time you press the button, cycling through male, female, child, and normal voice settings. This adds harmonies to the mic vocals. The harmony setting switches each time you press the button, cycling through Music Files (p. 41), Oct-Up (p. 38), Oct-Down (p. 38), and normal voice settings. This adds greater breadth to the sound. When the [Ambience/Reverb] button is set to Advanced 3D, pressing this button toggles the Advanced 3D effect on and off. When the [Ambience/Reverb] button is set to Surround, each press of this button takes you to the next choice among the available selections, which are: Surround Effect off, Surround Accompaniment, and Surround Reverb. This switches the genres of the internal songs. Selects songs in the Favorites. When you press the button with external memory or a disk connected, the connected storage media is selected. This mutes all of the sounds. You can use the function assigned to this button. You can also change the function assigned to the button (p. 148). The left and right tracks switch to a piano tone. Pressing the button toggles you between the Tones for the left-hand track and the right-hand track. Each press of the button takes you to the next selection among the available choices, which are, in order: song list, lyrics, notation, notation + keyboard, display, and user screen image. You can press the [DISPLAY] button while the Tempo screen or Volume screen is displayed to clear the Tempo screen or Volume screen.
* Some songs may not feature screens with lyrics or notations.
] button while the song is stopped, the previous song is
] button while a song is playing returns you to the When you press the [
selected. Pressing the [
beginning of that song. This starts and stops playback of the song. Playback alternately starts and stops each time you press the [
You can also assign functions to the button (p. 148).
] button. When you press the [
] button, the next song is selected. 10 11 12 VOL - +
(Volume) TEMPO - +
TRANSPOSE - +
You can adjust the volume. This adjusts the tempo. You can also assign functions to the button (p. 148). This adjusts the tempo. You can also assign functions to the button (p. 148). 72 Chapter 4 Practice Functions With the KR-107, you can enjoy practice using a variety of functions. Displaying the Notation The KR can display notations not only for the internal songs, but for music files and performances recorded with the KR. This is very convenient for performing while reading the music and for checking songs that have been recorded. When you play back a music file with lyrics, the lyrics appear on screen. Selecting the song When playing back songs on external memories, first connect the external memory to the external memory port. 1. Press the [Song] button to select a song. For details refer to Playing a Song (p. 64). 2. Press the [DigiScore] button. The Notation screen appears. fig.d-notation.eps_60 4 r e t p a h C 3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. Playback of the song begins, and the notation advances along with the progression of the performance. Notes Regarding the Notation Display When playback of a song begins, appears in the Notation screen. While this symbol is displayed, performance data is being loaded from external memory or internal memory. It may take thirty seconds to a minute or more to read the data. Please wait. The displayed notations are based on music files. Priority is placed on the readability of the displayed music, not on the accurate rendition of difficult, high-level performances. Thus, there may be discrepancies seen when compared with commercially available printed music. The display is not intended for viewing advanced songs requiring precisely detailed notations, or complex songs. On the notation display screen, lyrics and notes may extend beyond the range displayed on the screen and may not be visible. Playback may start over from the beginning if you display the notation or change the displayed part during playback of the song. 73 Using Visual Lesson, you can select practice songs suited to your skill level. Additionally, you can have the results your performance indicated in points and check the content in the score. Refer to the Quick Start. In some internal songs, the fingering is displayed. The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one possible fingering. Chord names can be displayed in some of the internal songs and recorded performances using the KRs Chord Sequencer (p. 120). You can make more advanced settings for the score by pressing the [Setting] button. NOTE No notes are shown in the notation if the selected part contains no data. To change the part being displayed, refer to Making Detailed Settings for the Notation Display (p. 75). Chapter 4 Practice Functions Touching Notes to Confirm the Sounds
(Touch the Notes) In the Notation screen, you can have notes played by touching the notes on the screen. When you display the keyboard in the screen (p. **), the keys on the keyboard for the notes you touch are then shown in the display. This allows you confirm notes by sight, sound, and touch. In addition, when you trace part of the notation with your finger, the traced segment is played back. This allows you to easily play back phrases you like. fig.d-notation-key.eps_60 4 r e t p a h C Scrolling the Notation Along with the Performances (Auto Sync DigiScore) You can have the notation displayed in the screen scroll automatically as you play, even when the song is not being played back. No more frantically trying to turn to the next page in the notation while you are performing. This also lets you play difficult passages more slowly and otherwise practice at your own pace.
* Auto Sync DigiScore is linked to the performance of the part shown in the screen. The notation does not scroll if you are playing a part that is not currently displayed. When the bouncing ball is blue Start playing at the point where the ball is bouncing. The bouncing ball follows along and the notation scrolls as you play. When the bouncing ball is red. If nothing is played for a short while, the bouncing ball turns red. At this time, if you play a phrase near the position of the bouncing ball, the ball automatically moves to the point in the notation where you are playing. NOTE You can change the automatic scrolling settings. Refer to p. 75. 74 Chapter 4 Practice Functions When you play four or more notes while the bouncing ball is red, the ball moves to the point where you are playing. When you play fewer than four notes, the bouncing ball does not jump to the new position, and the notation does not scroll. The bouncing ball will move within the range of the notation displayed on the external display or television. If you start playing at a point that is not currently shown in the external display or television, the bouncing ball does not jump to the new position, and the notation does not scroll. Making Detailed Settings for the Notation Display You can change the part appearing on the notation display and change the manner in which the notation is displayed. 1. Press the [DigiScore] button to display the Notation screen. 2. Press the [Option] button. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-notationopt.eps_60 NOTE You can change the parts to be displayed when you touch each of the icons. C h a p t e r 4 You can select the parts to be displayed in the notation by touching the four icons at the lower left of the screen. Switch the screens The right-hand part and left-hand part are displayed. The right-hand part is displayed. The left-hand part is displayed. The User part is displayed. You can also touch <BMP> to save the score as an image file (p. 77). 3. Touch for the parameter being set to select the value. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Notation screen. 75 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Item Zoom Sets whether or not the enlarged notation is displayed. Keyboard Sets whether the keyboard is displayed beneath the notation. AutoSync DigiScore Sets the function whereby the notation screen scrolls automatically as you play, even if the song is not played back. ON OFF ON OFF OFF JUMP NOTE Setting Displays an enlarged notation. Displays the notation at the normal size. Displayed. Not displayed. The notation screen does not scroll automatically. The notation screen scrolls automatically. When the bouncing ball is blue, playback begins from the point in the notation where the ball is set. When the bouncing ball is red, and you start playing a phrase at a point in the notation close to where the ball is located, the ball moves to the point where you are playing. This position is determined after you play at least four notes of the phrase. The notation screen scrolls automatically from the current position in the song as you play. BASIC Functions as a soft pedal. You can start and stop playback of song data with the pedal. Pressing the pedal in rapid succession moves you back in the song the number of measures equal to the number of times you press the pedal, after which playback resumes. This allows you to use the pedal to rewind quickly, a useful feature when, for example, you want to repeatedly listen to a difficult phrase. Advances the notation screen in the KR-
107's display to the next page. Advances the notation screen in the external display to the next page. Notes down to sixteenth notes are indicated. Notes down to thirty-second notes are indicated. Displayed. Not displayed. The note is displayed in color. Not displayed. Pedal Sets the left pedal function. REPLAY PAGE1 PAGE2 Resolution Sets the minimum note length indicated in the notation. Bouncing Ball This setting determines whether or not the animated ball is shown bouncing in time with the song as it is played back. Color Notation This settings determines whether or not the note in the current position is colored. 16 32 ON OFF ON OFF 4 r e t p a h C 76 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Item Lyrics This setting determines whether or not lyrics in songs that contain lyrics data appear in the notation. Finger Numbers This setting determines whether or not the fingering in songs that contain fingering data appears in the notation. Chords This setting determines whether or not chord names in songs that contain chord data appears in the notation. Pitches Sets whether or not the note names appear in the music when the notation is expanded. Clef L Determines whether a treble or bass clef is shown in the notation for the left-hand part. Clef R Determines whether treble or bass clef is shown in the notation for the right-hand part. Key Notation is displayed in the specified key. Setting ON The lyrics are displayed. OFF Not displayed. ON The fingering is displayed. OFF Not displayed. ON The chord names are displayed. OFF Not displayed. OFF C, D, E Do, Re, Mi
(Fixed) Do, Re, Mi
(Movable) Auto G Clef F Clef Auto G Clef F Clef Auto Not displayed. The pitch names (C, D, E) are displayed. The pitch names (fixed Do) are displayed. The syllable names (movable Do) are displayed. Display is switched automatically. G (treble) clef is displayed in the notation. F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation. Display is switched automatically. G (treble) clef is displayed in the notation. F (bass) clef is displayed in the notation. Key is switched automatically. b x 50
# x 6 Notation is displayed in the specified key. Item User Part Selects the part to display when User is selected as the part to be displayed. Lower Part Selects the part to display when Lower is selected as the part to be displayed. Upper Part Selects the part to display when Upper is selected as the part to be displayed. Setting User Track, Parts 116 Lower Track, Parts 116 Upper Track, Part 116 In some internal songs, the fingering is displayed. The fingering numbers shown in the screen indicate one possible fingering. C h a p t e r 4 Chord names can be displayed in some of the internal songs and recorded performances using the KRs Chord Sequencer (p. 120). 77 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Saving Notations as Image Data You can take notations that are displayed on the KR and save them to external memories. You can also use saved image data to your computer. 1. Insert the external memory onto which you want to save the image data in the KRs external memory port. 2. Record the performance (p. 90). Alternatively, press the [Song] button to NOTE Other than for your own personal enjoyment, use of the notations that are output without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. select a song. 3. Press the [DigiScore] button. The Notation screen appears. 4. Press the [Option] button. 5. Touch <Export>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-notationbmp.eps_60 4 r e t p a h C 6. Touch for each parameter to set the range of the image data. Start measure 1, 2 End Measure song end Media Layout 7. Touch <Execute>. Selects the measure at which output begins. Selects the measure at which output ends. Selects the media for the save destination. Sets the orientation of the score being output. The notation is saved to the external memory as image data in BMP (bitmap) format.
* You cannot save copyrighted song data.
* Other than for your own personal enjoyment, use of the notations that are output without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. 78 NOTE Do not remove the external memory while save is in progress. Chapter 4 Practice Functions Saving Your Visual Lesson Performance Results When you practice with Visual Lesson, the notation showing the model performance appears in the screen above the score for your own performance. You can save these notation in BMP (bitmap) format. 1. While in the performance results confirmation screen in Visual Lesson, press the [Setting] button. 2. Touch the parameter whose setting you want to change. 3. Set the value with the dial. 4. Touch <OK>. C h a p t e r 4 79 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Adjusting the Tempo This changes the song and Music Style tempos. If songs seem difficult to play at their original speed, you may find it helpful to first practice with the tempo slowed down. Then, after becoming more familiar with the song, you can practice it at a gradually faster tempo. Changing the tempo has no effect on the pitch of the notes. And you can change the tempo even when the song is in progress. fig.panel3-2 4 r e t p a h C Adjusting the tempo with the Tempo [-] [+] buttons Pressing the [+] button once increases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the button makes the tempo increase continuously. Pressing the [-] button once decreases the tempo by one unit. Holding down the button makes the tempo decrease continuously. Pressing the [-] [+] buttons simultaneously returns the selected Music Style or song to the basic tempo. Setting the Tempo by Pressing the Button in Time
(Tap Tempo) You can also set the tempo by pressing the Performance Pad. This feature is called Tap Tempo. By using the Tap Tempo function, you can quickly set the tempo you are thinking of, without specifying the tempo in numerical terms. fig.panel3-3 Assigning functions to the Performance Pads 1. Press the [User Function] button and watch the indicator light up. 80 fig.d-usrfunc.eps_60 Chapter 4 Practice Functions 2. Touch for the Performance Pad to which the function is assigned, then select Tap Tempo. 3. Press the [Exit] button; the tempo is indicated in the upper left of the screen. Specifying the Tempo 4. Press the Pad to which Tap Tempo is assigned at least twice. The tempo is set to the rhythm you used when tapping the button. Playing Back at a Fixed Tempo (Tempo Mute) If a song has tempo changes, it helps to practice the song first at a steady tempo. Overriding tempo changes is called Tempo Muting. 1. Hold down the [
[+] buttons.
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
When tempo muting is in effect, the tempo display appears in reverse video. fig.d-tempmute.eps_60 When you play back the song, it will play at a constant tempo. Cancel the tempo mute setting 1. Hold down the [
(Play/Stop)] button and press one of the Tempo [-]
[+] buttons. Tempo muting is canceled. Tempo Mute will also be cancelled when you select a different song. You can also assign the Tap Tempo function to the pedal, and use the pedal to specify the tempo. For details, refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads
(Pedal Setting/User Functions) (p. 142). C h a p t e r 4 You can start the song by giving the count through the microphone. For more detailed information, refer to Enabling the start of songs and automatic accompaniment with the sound of your voice
(Vocal Count-In) (p. 39). 81 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count) When youre playing along with a song, you can listen to the tempo before you start playing by adding a count-in. This audible count before the song playback is called a Count-In. fig.panel3-3 1. Press the [Count/Marker] button and watch the indicator light up. The following Count In settings screen appears. fig.d-cntin.eps_60 4 r e t p a h C 2. Touch <Count Mode>
to set this to Count In. With this setting, two measures count down before the song playback starts. Cancelling the Count In 1. Press the [Count/Marker] button so its indicator is turned off. By pressing [Back] instead of the [Count/Mark] button, you can close the Count settings screen without cancelling the count. You can have a count sound be played before the song starts playing back by holding down
(Reset)] button while the [
you press the [(
)Play/
Stop] button.The status of the Count settings wont be affected by your use of this procedure. For more about other settings on the Count settings screen, refer to Changing the Settings for the Count (p. 140). 82 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Muting Some Parts Before Playing
(Track Buttons) With commercially available music files for piano lessons, the part for each hand can be played back independently. This makes it easy to practice hands separately. For example, you can follow along with your right hand while you listen to that same right-hand part be played, or you can practice the left-hand part while the right-hand part plays. A music file for piano lessons may be assigned to the five Track buttons as shown below. fig.trackbuttons.e For more on music files, refer to Music Files That the KR Can Use (p. 183). You cannot mute individual parts separately in audio files. Drums/SFX Accom-
paniment Left-hand Right-hand Part Part By using these Track buttons, you can eliminate the sound of specific parts. This is referred to as muting. By recording your own performances to the Track Buttons in this fashion, you can mute parts the same way. For details, refer to Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings) (p. 95). If a single Track button includes more than one instrument and you want to mute just one of those instruments, take a look at Modifying the Settings of Each Part (p. 114). C h a p t e r 4 1. Select the song that you wish to play back (p. 64). Selecting the part that youll be playing 2. Press any one of the Track buttons to make the buttons indicator light go When a single Part is not played, it is called Minus One. Using Minus One, you can mute out a particular instrument and play the part yourself. dark. The sound for the selected part no longer plays. For example, when practicing the right hand, press the [4/Upper] button. When you play back the song, the right-hand performance will not sound. Practice your right-hand performance along with the left-hand playback. Playing back a song 3. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. The song will begin playing back. The part you selected in step 2 will not sound. Once again press the button you selected in step 2. The buttons indicator will light up, and the part will be heard once again. Even while the song is playing, you can press the track buttons to mute or un-mute the sound. Stopping the song 4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. The song will stop. When playing back SMF files for Roland Piano Digital series instruments, and the [3/
Lower] button and [4/Upper]
button do not correctly control the left/right-hand performances, please change the Track Assign settings. Please refer to Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback
(Track Assign) (p. 153). You can adjust the balance between the keyboard and song volume levels. Check out Adjusting the Volume Balance for Each Performance Part (Part Balance) (p. 62). 83 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Setting Markers for Repeated Practice
(Marker) By setting markers at points in a song that you want to practice repeatedly, you can then easily go to and repeat play back of the selected measures. Placing a Marker within a Song You can place two separate markers (Marker A and Marker B) in one song. These markers are placed at the beginning of a measure to make the beginning and end of a section of music. Placing markers is a handy way to start playback at the same place as many times as you like. You can add markers or move to a marker even while playback is in progress. Access the Marker screen First, select the song in which youll set the markers (p. 64). 4 r e t p a h C 1. Press the [Count/Marker] button. 2. Touch <Marker>. The Marker screen appears. fig.d-marker.eps_60 You cannot place markers in audio files. Placing Markers 3. Go to the measure where you want to set a marker using the [
(Bwd)]
and [
(Fwd)] buttons. 4. Touch <- - -> for Marker A. Marker A is placed at the beginning of the measure you selected.
- - - on the screen will change to the number of the measure where you placed the marker. 5. In the same way, touch the Marker B <- - -> to set Marker B. It is not possible to assign marker B to the same location or a measure before marker A. Markers can also be assigned in units of beats rather than measures. Refer to Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure (p. 140). 84 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Playback from a Marker Location 1. At the marker screen, touch the measure number of the marker you want to go to. fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60 Playback will start from wherever Marker A or Marker B are set. With the song playing back, playback will continue if you touch Marker A or Marker B on the Marker screen. Erasing a Marker 1. Touch <Clear> for the marker you want to erase. fig.d-markclear.eps_60 C h a p t e r 4 The marker disappears and the on-screen display changes to <- - ->. Moving a Marker You can move a marker that has been placed in a song. You can also move the section of music defined by Markers A and B forward or back, without changing the number of measures of marked. 1. On the Marker screen, touch fig.d-mark1-5.eps_60 or for the marker to be moved. When you touch
, the marker is moved to a previous part of the song. When you touch
, the marker is moved to a later part of the song. 85 Chapter 4 Practice Functions Moving Markers A and B without changing the interval between them 1. On the Marker screen, touch in the middle of the screen. For example, if you have Marker A set at the beginning of the fifth measure, and or Marker B set at the beginning of the ninth measure, when you touch A is moved to the beginning of the first measure, and Marker B is moved to the beginning of the fifth measure.
, Marker Touch to the beginning of the thirteenth measure. to shift Marker A to the beginning of the ninth measure and Marker B fig.markerA-B.e Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 Marker A Marker B Measure 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 4 r e t p a h C Marker A Marker B Playing Back the Same Passage Over and Over You can play back a particular passage over and over. This is convenient when you want to focus on a passage. 1. First, set Marker A and Marker B to define the measures you want to repeat. For instance, suppose you want to play back the passage from the fifth through eighth measures over and over. You should place Marker A at the beginning of the fifth bar and Marker B at the beginning of the ninth bar. fig.d-markrpt.eps_60 OFF ON 2. Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen. The setting is made for repeated playback of the passage from marker A to marker B. When you play the song, the marked section of music plays back repeatedly. Cancelling repeat playback 3. Touch <Repeat> in the Marker screen, and the icon returns to the original color. Repeat playback is cancelled. 86 When <Repeat> is On If neither Marker A nor Marker B is set, the song is played back from the beginning to the end. If you only place marker A, playback repeats from marker A to the end of the song. If you only place marker B, playback repeats from the beginning of the song to marker B. Chapter 4 Practice Functions Transposing Keyboard Sounds and Songs Played Back (Transpose) By using the Transpose function, you can transpose your performance without changing the notes you play. For example, even if the song is in a difficult key with many sharps (
read and play.
) or flats (
), you can transpose it to a key that is easier for you to You can also use this function to play back a song in a different key. When accompanying a vocalist, you can easily transpose the pitch to a range that is comfortable for the singer, while still playing the notes as written (i.e., with the same fingering positions). fig.panel3-4 You cannot transpose audio files. First make sure you have selected the song to be transposed (p. 64). 1. Press the [Transpose] button. A Transpose screen like the one below appears. fig.d-transpose.eps_60 2. Touch the Transpose icon. Icon Target Settings Value Keyboard sound Song to be played back
-605
-24024 Keyboard sounds, songs being played back
-605 C h a p t e r 4 87 Chapter 4 Practice Functions 3. Touch the screen keyboard or value.
, to select the transposition Each time you press or
, it transposes the key by a semitone. When you touch
, a value of 0 is set. You can also use the dial to change the transposition value. When you transpose a song or the keyboard, the [Transpose] buttons indicator lights up. As you play the keyboard or play back the song, the notes are transposed. When you press the [Exit] button, the transposition remains in effect, and youre returned to the previous screen. Cancelling Transposition 4. Press the [Transpose] button and the indicator light goes out. Transposition is cancelled. The next time you press the [Transpose] button, illuminating the indicator, the music is transposed by the value set here. 4 r e t p a h C The transposition value reverts to 0 when you turn off the power or select another song. Example: Playing a song in E major while playing the keys for C major In this example, C is the root note in the key of C major. E, the root of E major, is the third in C major. It is up four keys, including the black keys, so touch enter 4 for the setting.
, then fig.trans.e If you play C E G It will sound E G# B 88 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance You can easily record performances using the five track buttons. A recorded performance can be played back to listen to your own playing, or to add additional parts. You can use the KR to make the following kinds of recordings. Recording just your own keyboard performance ( Recording a New Song
(New Song) (p. 90)) Recording performances using Automatic Accompaniment
( Recording With Accompaniment (p. 92)) Recording along with the internal songs and songs on external memories
( Recording Along with a Song (p. 94)) Re-recording ( Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings) (p. 95)) If the following screen appears If youve recorded a song or changed a songs settings (see p. 114), the following message appears on the screen when you try to choose another song. If its okay to delete the song, touch <OK>. If you do not want to delete the song, touch <Cancel>, and either save the song to a external memory (p. 101) or register the song to the Favorites (p. 68). NOTE Recorded performances are discarded when another song is selected, or when the power is turned off. Be sure to save important performances on a external memory. Take a look at Saving Songs (p. 101). NOTE You cannot record while playing along with audio files. C h a p t e r 5 89 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording a New Song (New Song) This records keyboard performances without the use of the internal songs or Automatic Accompaniment. fig.panel4-1 Settings for recording performances 1. Press One Touch Program [Piano] button. This sets the KR for performance without the use of Automatic Accompaniment. 2. Decide on the tone of the performance (p. 22). Use the Tone buttons and the touch screen to select the tone. When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen. Recording settings 3. Press the [
(Rec)] button. You press the [
song has already been recorded.
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a fig.m-rec.eps_60 5 r e t p a h C Touch <New Song>. This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song. The KR is put in recording standby. To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more. 4. Decide on the tempo and beat. If necessary, press the [Metronome] button to play the metronome. When you have finished making the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen. 90 If you select <New Song>
when a song has already been recorded, the OK to delete song? prompt appears in the screen. For more detailed information, refer to If the following screen appears (p. 89). Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Start recording 5. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts. Even without pressing the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing rather than pushing the [
(Play/Stop)] button. When recording starts, the [
light up.
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Rec)] buttons indicators NOTE Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KR is turned off. If you do not want a performance deleted, then save it to a external memory or to Favorites. Refer to Saving Songs (p. 101). Stop recording 6. Press the [
Recording stops.
(Play/Stop)] button. The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button. Listening to the Recorded Performance 7. Press the [
(Reset)] button, then press the [
The recorded performance is played back.
(Play/Stop)] button. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, playback stops. Track buttons assignments for recorded performances When you record only a keyboard performance, the performance will be assigned to the track buttons as follows. Normal performance (playing a single Tone from the entire keyboard) The performance is recorded to the [1/Whole] button. Layer performance The performance is recorded to the [2/Accomp] button. Split performance The left-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/Lower] button, and the right-hand part of the keyboard is recorded to the [4/Upper] button. Layer performance and Split performance The performance played in the left side of the keyboard is recorded to the [3/
Left] button, the performance in the right side to the [4/Right] button, and the Layer performance to the [2/Accompaniment] button. Drum set or sound effect performance Recorded on the [R/Rhythm] button. C h a p t e r 5 91 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording With Accompaniment Try recording a performance along with the Automatic Accompaniment. Settings for recording performances 1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button. This chooses the setting for Automatic Accompaniment. 2. Decide on the Music Style. When you have finished choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen. Recording Settings 3. Press the [
(Rec)] button. You press the [
song has already been recorded.
(Rec)] button and the following messages will appear, when a fig.m-rec.eps_60 5 r e t p a h C Touch <New Song>. This switches the KR to the settings required for recording a new song. The KR is put in recording standby. To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more. 4. Decide on the tempo. Start recording 5. Play a chord on the left-hand part of the keyboard. An Automatic Accompaniment intro starts, and recording starts at the same time. Stop recording 6. Press the [Intro/Ending] button. An ending plays, then the Automatic Accompaniment, and recording stop at the same time. Listening to the recorded performance 7. Press the [
(Reset)] button, then press the [
The recorded performance plays back.
(Play/Stop)] button. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, playback stops. 92 If you select <New Song>
when a song has already been recorded, the OK to delete song? prompt appears in the screen. For more detailed information, refer to If the following screen appears (p. 89). You can change how recording is stopped when recording a performance with Automatic Accompaniment. To learn how, see Changing How Recording Stops (p. 96). Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Track buttons assignments for recorded performances Performances that have been recorded using Automatic Accompaniment are assigned to the track buttons as shown below. Track button Performance Recorded Music Styles are composed of eight parts. For details, refer to Music Styles and Automatic Accompaniment (p. 46).
[R/Rhythm]
[1/Whole]
[2/ Bass Accomp]
[3/Lower]
The rhythm part of an Automatic Accompaniment is recorded here. In addition, drum sets and effect sounds that are selected with the keys in a performance are recorded to this track. When using Piano Style accompaniment (p. 61), the performance played on the keyboard is recorded here. The Automatic Accompaniment bass part and accompaniment part are recorded here. When the KR is set so that sounds from performances on the left-hand side of the keyboard are played while the Automatic Accompaniment sounds (p. 60), your own performance on the left-hand side of the keyboard is recorded here.
[4/Upper]
Your own performance on the right-hand side of the keyboard is recorded here. C h a p t e r 5 93 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Recording Along with a Song Try recording along with internal songs and songs on external memories. Here, record your right-hand performance along with the song accompaniment. Settings for recording performances Select a song before you begin recording. When you have selected the song, press the [DigiScore] button to display the notation. For more on how to select songs, refer to p. 64; for instructions on displaying the notation, refer to p. 73. 1. Decide on the tone and tempo of the performance. After choosing the settings, press the [Exit] button to display the Basic screen. Recording settings 2. Press the [
(Rec)] button. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.m-rec.eps_60 The song tempo is stored within the song you selected. 5 r e t p a h C 3. Touch <Add On>. With this setting, you can record while listening to the selected song. Selecting the track to record 4. Press the track button for the track that you want to record (i.e., the track that you want to play yourself). The indicator of the button you pressed will blink, and the KR enters recording-
standby mode. Since in this example we will record the right-hand performance, press the [4/
Upper] button to make the buttons indicator light blink. To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more. Start recording 5. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. NOTE Only drum sets or SFX set are recorded to the [R/Rhythm]
button. A two-bar count-in plays, then recording starts. Even without pressing the [
play the keyboard. There is no count-in played when you start by playing the keyboard instead of pushing the [
When recording starts, the [
(Play/Stop)] button.
(Play/Stop)] and [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording starts when you
(Rec)] buttons indicators light. Stop recording 6. Press the [
Recording stops. 94
(Play/Stop)] button. Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Listening to the recorded performance 7. Press the [
(Reset)] button, then press the [
The recorded performance is played back.
(Play/Stop)] button. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording stops. Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings) When you want to re-record, specify the Track button for the performance you want to re-record, and then record again. When you select a previously recorded Track button and re-record, everything from the point at which you begin recording up to the point where you stop recording will be replaced by the newly re-recorded performance. 1. Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to go to the measure When you want to record over again after deleting all of the previous recording, refer to Erasing Recorded Performances (p. 96). where you want to begin recording. 2. Press the [
(Rec)] button. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.m-rec.eps_60 C h a p t e r 5 The song tempo is stored within the song you selected. If you want to change the tempo of the recorded song, refer to Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs (p. 127) and Changing the Tempo Within the Song (p. 127). 3. Touch <Add on>. 4. Press the Track button for the track you want to re-record. The indicator for the selected Track button starts blinking. The [
standby.
(Play/Stop)] buttons indicator flashes, and the KR is put in recording To cancel recording, press the [
(Rec)] button once more.
(Play/Stop)] button to begin recording. 5. Press the [
Rerecording the accompaniment part of automatic accompaniment When rerecording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, set Sync Start (p. 54), then specify a chord or press the [Start/Stop] button. 6. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button to stop recording. If you also want to rerecord the ending of the Automatic Accompaniment, press the
[Intro/Ending] button. 95 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Erasing Recorded Performances You can use the following method to delete a recorded performance. 1. Hold down the [Song] button and press the [
(Rec)] button. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.m-songdel.eps_60 2. Touch <OK>. This deletes the recorded song. When you touch <Cancel>, the previous screen appears and the recorded song is not erased. Erasing the Performance on Specific Tracks You can select and erase performances on specific tracks. 1. Hold down the Track button for the track containing the performance you want to erase, then press the [
(Rec)] button. The Track buttons light goes dark, and the recorded music is erased. 5 r e t p a h C Changing How Recording Stops When recording an Automatic Accompaniment performance, you can change the accompaniment and the way recording mode stops. 1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up. The Menu screen appears. 2. Touch <Rec Mode>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-recmode.eps_60 96 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance 3. Touch <Rec Stop>
Composer Stop. to switch between Arranger Stop and Display Arranger Stop Composer Stop Explanation Recording stops at the same time the Automatic Accompaniment stops. Recording does not stop, even when the Automatic Accompaniment stops. When you press the [
Stop)] button, recording stops.
(Play/
Recording Songs Starting with Pickups You can record songs that start with pickup beats (songs that start on a beat other than the measures first beat). fig.PU.e Count Sound Measure -2 PU 1
Recording begins here Carry out Steps 14 on p. 90 to prepare for recording.
(Rec)] buttons indicator is not lit, press the [
If the [
indicator is lit. The KR is put in recording standby. 1. Press the [
(Bwd)] button one time.
(Rec)] button so the The measure number in the upper right of the Basic screen changes to PU, and the KR is set to record a song starting with a pickup. fig.d-pu.eps_60 Start recording. After a one-measure count, recording begins. C h a p t e r 5 97
1 | USERS MANUAL 3 | Users Manual | 2.67 MiB | July 03 2005 / March 03 2005 |
Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Using External Memories If you install separately available external memory or a floppy disk drive, you'll be able to save songs you've recorded and listen to commercially available music data. Connecting and Ejecting a External Memory 1. Press the External Memory port cover and open the cover. Press the cover in; the cover will open. If connecting an optional floppy disk drive, substitute floppy disk wherever the term external memory appears here. 2. Connect the external memory to the External Memory port. NOTE Use external memory available from Roland. Proper functioning cannot be guaranteed if other external memory products are used. 5 r e t p a h C 3. Press the cover in again to close the cover.
* Always keep the Ext Memory port cover closed except when connecting and disconnecting external memory. Locking the External Memory Port Cover When connecting external memory (sold separately), you can lock the memory port cover to prevent theft of the connected external memory. 1. Connect the external memory to the external memory port. 2. Press the External Memory port cover to close the cover. 3. Secure the lock using the anti-theft lock screws included with the instrument. s NOTE Take care not to lose the anti-
theft lock screws. Also be sure to use only the included screws to secure the anti-theft lock. 98 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Formatting Media (Format) The process of preparing external memory or disks so that they can be used with the KR-107 is called initialization (formatting). In certain cases, particularly with floppy disks, the media is formatted for a specific type of device. If the media format does not match the KR-107's, you will not be able to use that media with the KR-107. fig.panel4-3 1. 2. 3. Connect the external memory to the external memory port. Press the [Song/File] button. Touch <File>. A File screen like the one below appears. fig.d-songfile.eps_60 4. Touch <Format>. The following screen appears. NOTE When a external memory is initialized, all of the data saved on the external memory is erased. If youre formatting a used external memory for reuse, be sure to check first to make sure the external memory doesnt contain any data you dont want to lose. NOTE When initializing floppy disks, check to make sure that the disk's write protect tab is slid to the write position. C h a p t e r 5 NOTE Do not eject the floppy disk while data is being read from or written to the disk. This may scratch the disk's magnetic surface, rendering the disk unusable. (The disk drive's indicator lights brightly while data is being read from or written to the disk. At all other times, the indicator is lit more dimly, or is not lit at all.) 99 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance fig.d-format.eps_60 NOTE Do not remove the storage media until the initialization is completed. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the previous screen. Touch <Media> ** ** to select the storage media to be initialized. Touch <Execute>. A confirmation screen appears. If you want to quit the initialization, touch <Cancel>. Touch <OK>. Initialization of the external memory begins. When initialization is completed, youre returned to the previous screen. NOTE If Error appears on screen, take a look at Error Messages (p. 169). 5. 6. 7. 5 r e t p a h C 100 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Saving Songs A recorded performance is discarded when you switch off the power or choose another song. Storing recorded performances and other data to external memories or the Favorites is called saving. Be sure to save important songs to external memories or Favorites. What are Favorites?
You can register songs you are currently practicing or particularly like to Favorites, allowing you to select these songs easily (p. 68). When you register a song on a external memory to Favorites, you can then play back the song without connecting the external memory to the external memory connector. Substitute the words floppy disk drive for external memory if using a separately purchased floppy disk drive. When using a new strage media, first initialize (format) the external memory on the KR. Take a look at Formatting Media (Format) (p. 99). If a recorded performance is saved to Favorites, the performance wont be erased when the power is turned off. NOTE Preparations for Saving Data When saving to external memories, connect the external memory to the external memory port. 1. 2. 3. Press the [Song/File] button. Touch <File>. Touch <Save>. The following Save Song screen appears. fig.d-songsave.eps_60 Some commercially available music files cannot be saved because they are copy protected. When saving to floppy disks, first check to make sure that the floppy disks protect tab is set to the Write position
(p.*). C h a p t e r 5 If not handled with care, a floppy disk can be damaged, or the data on it become corrupted, making playback impossible. We recommend saving your songs on two different floppy disks. When you want to clear all of the content saved to the Favorites and restore the settings to the original factory condition on the KR, refer to Formatting the User Memory (p. 150). 101 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Determining the name of the song to be saved 4. Touch <Rename>. The following Rename screen appears. fig.d-songname.eps_60 When you touch
, the cursor moves. When you touch the icon for the letter or character to be input, the character appears at the cursor location. For example touching <ABC> in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group (A Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through English (upper case), English (lower case), numerals, symbols, then back to English (upper case). When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted. When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position. C...). B 5 r e t p a h C When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit] button. 5. Determining the Save Destination 6. Touch <Media>
to select the save-destination storage media. Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a external memory; touch <Favorites> if you are saving to Favorites. 7. Touch <File>
to select the save-destination song number. If a song name is displayed with a number a song is already saved to that number. If you select a number with a previously saved song and then proceed to save a new song, the previously saved song will be erased. If you do not want to lose a saved song, select a number with no song name indicated in the save-destination column. Selecting the Save Setting (when saving to external memories) 8. Touch <Save Setting>. 9. Touch Tone Compatibility format. to select the tone compatibility 102 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Some Tones are unique to the KR. Data that is recorded using these tones may not play back correctly on other Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players. When you want to save data so that it can be played back on another devices, save the data with MT set as the Tone compatibility format. Display Explanation Tone Compati bility KR MT The song is saved as data capable of reproducing performances with richness of expression using this units special Tones. Data is saved in a form that can also be played on the Roland Digital Pianos or Music Players other than this unit. You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-G/R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices.
<Note>
When data saved with MT as the Tone compatibility format is played back on this instrument, some of the nuances that were part of the performance at the time the data was recorded may be altered. Even with data saved with MT as the Tone compatibility format, an exact reproduction of the original performance may be unobtainable when using GS devices other than Roland Pianos and Music Players. 10. Touch <File Format>
to select the file format. The resulting file format will be different depending on whether <Save> or <As SMF> is chosen, as described below. NOTE Depending on the playback instrument, some notes may drop out or sound different. Display Explanation File Format Save Save As SMF Saves the song in this units format. You can listen to songs saved in this format on the Roland HP-G/R series and KR series keyboards as well as on Roland MT series devices. This format is called i-format. Saves the song as an SMF (Standard MIDI Files). Songs saved in this SMF format can be listened to on many instruments that can play SMF music files (p. 183). A song recorded using commercial music files cant be saved in Save As SMF format for reasons of copyright protection. 11. Press the [Exit] button. Save 12. Touch <OK> to start saving. The time required for saving ranges from several seconds to half a minute or more. Dont take the external memory out of the external memory port until the saving process is finished. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song File screen. NOTE Never turn off the power while the saving operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. Its a good idea to get into the habit of moving the write-
protect tab on the floppy disk to the Protect position when youve finished saving your data. Keeping the tab at Protect prevents operations that could erase your songs by mistake. 103 C h a p t e r 5 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Deleting Saved Songs This deletes songs that have been saved on external memories, or to Favorites. To delete a song on a external memory, first connect the external memory to the external memory port. 1. 2. 3. Press the [Song/File] button. Touch <File>. The Song File screen appears. Touch <Delete>. A Delete Song screen appears. fig.d-songdel.eps_60 Touch <Media>
to select the storage media. Touch <File>
to select the song to be deleted. Touch <Execute>. The selected song is deleted. Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the operation is finished. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Song File screen. NOTE Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. 5 r e t p a h C 4. 5. 6. 104 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance Copying Songs on External Memories to Favorites You can take songs saved on external memories and copy them to Favorites. You can also copy songs in Favorites to external memories. 1. Connect the external memory with the song to be copied to the external memory port. Press the [Song/File] button. 2. 3. Touch <File>. 4. Touch <Copy>. The following Copy Song screen appears. fig.d-songcopy.eps_60 C h a p t e r 5 Specifying the Copy Source 5. Touch the <Media>
6. Touch the <File>
to select the copy source storage media. to select the song you want to copy. When Copy All is selected, all of the songs on the external memory are copied to Favorites. Specifying the Copy Destination 7. Touch <Favorites>
song. to select the copy destination for the If a song name is displayed with a number, a song is already saved to that number. If you select a number with previously saved song data and proceed to copy to that location, the previously saved song will be erased. If you dont want to erase a previously saved song, choose a number with no song name appears in the destination column. 105 Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance 8. Touch <Execute>. Do not eject the external memory from the external memory port until the copy is finished. The song from the external memory is copied to Favorites. Copying Songs Saved in Favorites to External Memories Songs thatve been saved to Favorites can be copied onto external memories. In this case, in the Copy Song screen in Step 4 above, touch the arrow icon in the center to point the arrow upwards. This sets the KR to copy the song in Favorites to the external memory. fig.d-songcopy2.eps_60 NOTE Never turn off the power while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying songs from external memories to Favorites. Some song data cannot copy because they are copy protected. 5 r e t p a h C 106 Chapter 6 User Program Registration Saving Performance Settings
(User Program) Any collection of settings, including those describing the current status of your data selections or settings Automatic Accompaniment, can be saved to the [User Program] button. You can then call up the stored settings by pressing the [User Program] button. Saving your preferred combinations of Music Styles and Tones, as well as other frequently used settings, makes it more convenient. You can register up to 36 User Programs to the KR. fig.panel_UPG For more on what can be registered to a User Program, refer to Parameters Stored in the User Program (p. 182). 1. Set the Music Style, Tone, and other data until the settings are the way you want them. 2. Press the [User Program] button. A User Program screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-upg.eps_50 6 r e t p a h C 3. Touch <Write>. A Write User Program screen like the following appears. fig.d-upgwrite.eps_50 107 Determining the name of the User Programs 4. Touch <Rename>. A Rename screen like the following appears. fig.d-upgname.eps_50 When you touch
, the cursor moves. When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the character appears of the cursor potion. For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group (ABCA...). Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through English (upper case), English (lower case), numerals, symbols, then back to English (upper case). When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted. When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position. 5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button. Youre returned to the Write User Program screen. Determining the write destination 6. Touch number. 7. Touch <Write>. to select the write-destination The confirmation message appears. 8. Touch <OK>. The current performance settings are saved to the [User Program] button.
* Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Writing...>. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. You can restore the content registered to the [User Program]
button to the original factory settings. Refer to Restoring the Factory Settings (Factory Reset) (p. 148). Chapter 6 User Program Registration Calling Up Saved User Programs You can easily call up settings saved to the [User Program]
button. 1. Press the [User Program] button. The User Program screen appears. Touch the scroll bar and drag up or down to scroll through the screen and display other options. Touch the page icons to change pages. 2. Touch the name of the User Program you want to call up. Saving the User Program Sets You can take the 36 User Programs saved to the [User Program] button and save them as a set to a floppy disk, or to user memory. When saving to an external memory, first connect an external memory to the external memory port. For more on working with the disk drive, refer to Using External Memories (p. 98). 1. Press the [User Program] button. 2. Touch <File>. 3. Touch <Save>. When you touch the name of the User Program, the buttons or other performance settings instantly change to the previously saved settings. A Save User Program screen like the following appears. fig.d-upgsave.eps_50 Changing the Way User Programs Are Called Up When calling up User Programs, you can prevent the settings for Automatic Accompaniment from switching by not touching the touch screen for a few moments. 1. Press the [User Program] button. 2. Press the [Option] button in the lower part of the 6 r e t p a h C screen. A settings screen like the following appears. fig.d-upgopt.eps_50 3. Touch <Instant> or <Delayed> to select the setting. Display Explanation Instant Delayed Immediately after a User Program name is touched, the Automatic Accompaniment settings also switch. The Automatic Accompaniment settings switch after you touch and road the User Program name for a few moments. Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program screen. 108 Giving a name to a set of User Programs 4. Touch <Rename>. The Rename screen appears. When you touch
, the cursor moves. When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the character appears at the cursor position. For example touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group
(ABCA...). Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through English (upper case), English (lower case), numerals, symbols, then back to English (upper case). When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted. When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position. 5. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button. Determining the save destination 6. Touch <MEdia>
to select the save-
destination strage media. Touch <Disk> if you are saving to a floppy disk; touch
<User> if you are saving to user memory. 7. Touch <File>
to select the save-
destination User Program number. If a User Program set name is displayed, a User Program set saved to that saved to that number is already. If you select a number with previously saved User Program set data, then save a new set of data to that same number, the older User Program set will be deleted. If you dont want to lose any previously saved User Programs, select a number in the save-destination column that does not yet have a name. Save 8. Touch <Save> to begin the save. Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program File screen.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. When clearing the set of saved User Programs, refer to Deleting Saved User Program Sets (p. 110). Chapter 6 User Program Registration Loading Saved User Program Sets User Programs that have been saved on floppy disks or in user memory can be called up, on an individual set basis, to the [User Program] button.
* Note that calling up these User Programs results in the deletion of all User Programs currently recorded to the [User Program] button. When loading a set of User Programs from an external memory, first connect the external memory to the external memory port. For more on working with the external memory, refer to Using External Memories (p. 98). 1. Press the [User Program] button. 2. Touch <File>. 3. Touch <Load>. A Load User Program screen like the following appears. fig.d-upgload.eps_50 C h a p t e r 6 Specifying the set of User Programs to be loaded 4. Touch <
read from.
> to select the storage media to be 5. Touch the name of User Program to load. 6. Touch <Load>. The confirmation message appears. 7. Touch <OK>. The selected User Programs are loaded to the [User Program] button.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. 109 Chapter 6 User Program Registration Deleting Saved User Program Sets You can delete individual User Program sets saved to external memories or in user memory. When deleting a set of User Programs on an external memory, first connect the external memory to the external memory port. For more on working with the external memory, refer to Using External Memories (p. 98). 1. Press the [User Program] button. 2. Touch <File>. 3. Touch <Delete>. A Delete User Program screen like the following appears. fig.d-upgdel.eps_50 Copying Sets of User Programs on Floppy Disks to the User Memory You can copy sets of User Programs saved on external memories and to user memory. You can also copy sets of User Programs saved in user memory and to external memories. 1. Insert the external memory with the settings to be copied in the disk drive. 2. Touch the [User Program] button. 3. Touch <File>. 4. Touch <Copy>. A Copy User Programs screen like the following appears. fig.d-upgcopy.eps_50 6 r e t p a h C 4. Touch <Media>
to select the strage media. 5. Touch to be deleted. 6. Touch <Delete>. to select the set of User Programs A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.msg_filedel 7. Touch <OK>. The selected User Programs are deleted. Touching <Cancel> cancels deleting the file.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. 110 Specifying the copy source 5. Touch <Media>
media. to select the strage 6. Touch <File>
to select the set of User Programs you want to copy. When All is selected, all of the sets of User Programs on the floppy disk are copied to user memory. Specifying the copy destination 7. Touch <User>
to select the copy destination for the set of User Programs. If a User Program name is displayed, already a User Program saved to that number is already. If you select a number with User Programs data, and then copy data to that number, the previously saved User Programs are deleted. If you do not want to delete the saved User Programs, select a number in the save-
destination column for which no name is displayed. 8. Touch <Execute>. The set of User Programs on the floppy disk is saved to user memory.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. Coping Sets of User Programs Stored in the User Memory to Floppy Disks You can take User Program sets saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks. In this case, in the Copy User Programs screen in Step 4 above, touch the large arrow icon in the center to get the arrow to point up. This sets the KR to copy the User Program set in the user memory to the floppy disk. The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying sets of User Program set from external memories to user memory. Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs You can assign the function of the sequential switching of the User Programs to the pedal. That way, each time you depress the pedal, the KR107 switches to the next User Program. Great for use in concerts and similar situations, this allows you to prepare and save your User Programs in the sequence they are to be used, and then call up User Programs in the appropriate order while you perform, simply by depressing the pedal. 1. Press the [User Program] button. 2. Touch <Pedal> in the lower part of the screen. A Copy User Programs screen like the following appears. fig.d-upgopt.eps_50 Chapter 6 User Program Registration Selecting the Pedal Used for Switching Settings (Pedal Shift) 3. Touch <Pedal Shift>
to select the setting. Display Explanation Off Left Pedal Center Pedal You can use a function assigned to the pedal. The left pedal is dedicated to switching User Programs.The function assigned to the left pedal cannot be used. The center pedal is dedicated to switching User Programs.The function assigned to the center pedal cannot be used. Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program screen. Sequential Loading of User Program Sets Stored in External Memory (Load Next) When using the pedal to switch your User Programs, you can also call up sequential sets of User Programs as saved to external memory. This feature is called the Load Next function. 3. Touch <Load Next>
to select the setting. Display Explanation C h a p t e r 6 Off On Switches Load Next off. The next press of the pedal after the 36th User Program is called up returns you to the first User Program of the same User Program set. Switches Load Next on. The next press of the pedal after the 36th User Program has been called up takes you to the first User Program in the next User Program set. Press the [Exit] button to return to the User Program screen. 111 Chapter 6 User Program Registration Simultaneously Switching User Program and Transmitting PC Numbers You can have PC (Program Change) numbers be transmitted to an external MIDI device when you switch the User Program on the KR. You can register PC number settings to each of the User Programs, just as you can with button settings and other settings preferences. Calling Up the Performance Settings to Be Set 1. Press the [User Program] button, then touch the name of the performance setting you want to set. Setting the Transmission of the PC 2. Touch <PC Set> in the User Program screen. The following type of screen appears. fig-upgPCset.eps_50 6 r e t p a h C 3. Touch settings. for the parameter and make the Display Description Tx PC Channel Bank Select MSB Bank Select LSB This prevents the PC number from being transmitted (Off), or sets the transmission channel (Channel 116). Sets the Bank Select MSB. Sets the Bank Select LSB. Program Change Sets the Program Change messages
(Program Numbers). 4. Press the [Exit] button. The User Program screen returns to the display. Touch <Write> to save the setting to the User Program. For more detailed information, refer to Saving Performance Settings (User Program) (p. 107). 112 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer) Multitrack recording always you to listen to previously recorded material while continuing to add performances of other parts. The KR is capable of multitrack recording of up to sixteen parts. Since each parts performance is recorded using one tone, you can layer performances, using up to sixteen tones for the data in one song. The function used to layer these sixteen parts, one at a time, is called the 16-Track Sequencer. fig.16track.e 16-Track Sequencer You can record performances for up to 16 parts, overlaying them part by part, to create a single song. Flute Part Bass Part Piano Part (left hand) Piano Part (right hand) Part 1 Part 2 Part 3 Part 4 Part 16 16-Track Sequencer and Track Buttons In addition to the 16-Track Sequencer function, the Track Buttons (p. 83) are another of the units playing/recording functions. These five Track buttons are used for organizing the 16-
Track Sequencers sixteen parts. This allows you to use the 16-Track Sequencer to add more sounds to performances recorded with the Track buttons, and make even more detailed edits of the songs. You can easily play back the original song data with the 16-
Track Sequencer, mute parts by pressing the Track buttons, and more. The Track buttons correspond to 16-track sequencer parts as shown below. Track button
[R/Rhythm]
[1/Whole]
Part D (10), S (11) 1
[2/Bass Accomp]
2, 59, 1216
[3/Lower]
[4/Upper]
3 4 Since the 16-Track Sequencer records one tone to one part, you cannot use Layer performance (p. 25), Split performance
(p. 26), or other such functions to record two or more tones simultaneously. Also, you cant record the performance with Automatic Accompaniment. When you want to record with Automatic Accompaniment, then you should use the Track buttons for recording. (Refer to Recording With Accompaniment (p. 92)) Commercially Available Music Files Commercially available song file recorded in Rolands SMF format is also composed of sixteen parts. By loading the song file from the floppy disk and using the 16-Track Sequencer, you can then also edit the song file. Although with commercially available Roland SMF music data, Part 11 is included in the [2/Bass Accomp] track button, other tracks match to the corresponding Track buttons.
* With some commercially available music files, you cannot edit the data. The 16-Track Sequencer Screen When recording with 16-track Sequencer, display the 16-
track Sequencer screen. 1. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. 2. Touch <16trk Sequencer>. A 16-track Sequencer screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-16tr.eps_50 Icon Explanation
<1><16>
Touch to select the part to be recorded, or the part whose settings are to be changed. The button for the selected part changes color. C h a p t e r 7 This Part to be played back The Part not to be played back (Muted Part) Parts that do not have performance data recorded to them. Only the selected Part is played back. This allows you to prevent the sound for the selected part from playing. The performance data for the selected part is deleted. This displays the Part Settings screen, in which you can make detailed settings for each part. For details refer to p. 114. The Tone Set screen appears. For details refer to p. 115. Solo Mute Clear Options Tone Set 113 parameter and turning the dial or by touching and dragging the slider. Display Volume Reverb Chorus Panpot Explanation Changes the volume level. Changes the amount of reverb effect applied to the sound. Changes the amount of chorus applied. Shifts the direction from which the sound is heard between left and right. Touch to shift the sound to the right, or touch to shift it to the left. Whats Panpot?
Panpot is the control that determines the placement of the sound in the stereo sound field between left and right speakers. By altering the Panpot setting, you can change the perceived location of the sound between the left and right speakers.
(Play/Stop)] button, you When you press the [
hear what the song sounds like as you change the settings. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)]
button, playback of the song stops. 5. Touch to make settings for other parts. The Part name appears at the upper part of the screen. Change the settings for other parts as needed. 6. Hold down the [
(Reset)] button.
(Rec)] button and press the [
This operation set the changes in the settings. The song can then be saved to a floppy disk or to user memory. If you do not want to delete a song after changing the settings for the individual parts, save the song to a floppy disk or to user memory (p. 101).
* You cannot save the settings that determine whether sounds for each individual part are played or not (solo and mute). Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Modifying the Settings of Each Part You can change the Tones and volume, as well as mute the playback, for each individual part in songs recorded with the 16-track Sequencer and the internal songs. Because commercially available Roland SMF music files are also made up of 16 Parts, you can change the settings for the individual Parts and play them back in the same way. First, select the song for which the settings are to be made
(p. 64). 1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 113). 2. Touch the screen to choose the Part for which you want to make settings. Change the settings for the selected Part. Display Function Solo Mute Clear Only the selected Part is played back. Toggles playback of the selected Part to on or off. The performance data for the selected part is deleted.
* When you touch <Clear>, a message asking you to confirm the deletion appears. To erase the recorded sound, touch <OK>. If you dont want to erase the recorded sound, touch <Cancel>. Once a performance has been erased, it cant be restored.
* You cannot touch <Clear> during playback of the song. 3. Touch <Options> to make more detailed settings for the selected part. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-16trpart.eps_50 7 r e t p a h C You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone button while this screen is displayed. When selecting Part 10 or 11, you can touch <Drum Set>
to select the drum set or effect sound. The Part name and tone name are displayed at the top of the screen. 4. Touch the setting. for the corresponding item to change You can adjust the values by touching the desired 114 If the following message appears If you try to display another screen after youve changed the songs settings for each Part, a message like the one below may appear. fig.m-songmod.eps Touch <OK> to change the songs settings. Touch <Cancel> to discard the changes youre made. Getting the Most Suitable Part Tones for the Musical Genre
(Tone Set) Tone Set is a function that automatically assigns the most suitable tones for the selected musical style. When youre creating a song, you can assign Tone sets, then change the Tones to suit the ideas you have for your song. 1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 113). 2. Touch <Tone Set> in the lower part of the screen. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-16trtone.eps_50 3. Touch the screen to select a musical genre. 4. Press the [Exit] button. The 16-track Sequencer screen appears. Tones for each part are assigned automatically.
In some genres, some parts may have no tone assigned. Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Recording a Performance Step 1 Prepare for Recording Selecting the song to record 1. Hold down the [Song] button and press the [
(Rec)]
button. The following screen is displayed if there is any previously recorded performance or any song with changed settings. fig.m-songmod.eps Touch <Yes> to delete the song. If you want to overwrite while recording, select a song. If a song has already been recorded, or if the songs settings have been changed, the OK to delete Song? confirmation prompt appears when you touch <0: (Song Name)>. For more information, take a look at If the following screen appears (p. 89). Determining the songs beat and tempo 2. Press the [Metronome] button to select the beat (p. 43). You cant change a songs beat once its been recorded. If you want to compose a song whose beat changes partway through the song, take a look at Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song (Beat Map) (p. 127). 3. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to set the basic tempo of the song. If you do not need the metronome sound, press the
[Metronome] button once more. When using song data that has already been recorded, the recording is made using the source songs basic tempo. To change the basic tempo of a song, please refer to Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs (p. 127). C h a p t e r 7 115 Changing the Recording Method (Rec Mode) You can use any of the four methods below to record with the KR. Although you will normally be using Replace Recording, where previously recorded material is erased when new sounds are recorded, youll find that you can record songs easily by using this method in combination with other recording methods. Replace Recording (p. 117) This is the normal method for recording. New material is recorded as previously recorded material is erased. Mix Recording (p. 117) New notes are recorded on top of notes previously recorded. This convenient feature makes it easy for you to record melodies over prerecorded accompaniment. Loop Recording (p. 117) Specified measures are recorded repeatedly, while new notes are combined with existing music. A convenient feature for creating rhythm parts. Loop Recording allows you to record over and over within a selected segment, adding a different percussion sound with each pass. Punch-in Recording (p. 118) You can re-record only a specified passage as you listen to a recorded performance. Immediately after the power is turned on, Replace Recording is selected. Changing the Recording Method 1. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. fig.d-menu1.eps_50 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Step 2 Start Recording If necessary, choose a recording method. For more on how to record, refer to p. 116. If you record for the first time, theres no need to select the recording method. Selecting the Part to Record 1. Display the 16-track Sequencer screen (p. 113). 2. Touch the number for the Part you want to record. The button for the touched part being set turns orange. You can only record drum sounds or effect sounds on Part D (10) or Part S (11). You can select drum sets or effect sounds by selecting Part D (10) or Part S (11) and touching <Drum Set>. Selecting the sound to play 3. Use the Tone buttons to choose a Tone to play. After selecting a Tone, press the [Exit] button to call up the 16-Track Sequencer screen. Recording the performance 4. Press the [
(Reset)] button. Recording will start at the beginning of the song. If you want to record from a point other than the beginning, use the [
buttons to select another measure to begin.
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)]
5. Press the [
light up.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is The KR is put in recording standby. 6. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. A two-bar count-in sounds, then recording starts.
* You cannot use the performance pads when recording with the 7 r e t p a h C 16-track sequencer. 7. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. Recording stops. When one part is recorded, continue by selecting and recording another part. Continue layering parts to finish recording the song. You only need to follow the procedure described in Step 1 Prepare for Recording when youre recording the first Part. For the second Part and after, you can skip step 1 and proceed from Step 2 Start Recording.
* Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KR is turned off. It is a good idea to save song data to a floppy disk or user memory. For more information, refer to Saving Songs (p. 101). 116 2. Touch <Rec Mode>. A Rec Mode screen like the following appears. fig.d-recmode.eps_50 3. Touch <Rec Mode>
to select the recording mode. Display Replace Mix Loop Recording Method Replace Recording Mix Recording Loop Recording Auto Punch-
In/Out Punch-in recording of the interval between set markers. Manual Punch-In/Out Punch-in recording starting from the point at which the pedal, the Performance Pad or the [
button is pressed. For more about Punch In Recording, refer to p. 118.
(Rec)]
Tempo You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition. See p. 127. 4. Press the [Exit] button. Returns to the Menu screen. Recording While Erasing the Previous Recording (Replace Recording) The recording process where previous material is erased as new material is recorded is called replace recording. This setting is in effect when you turn on the power. 1. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 116), select <Replace>. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen. The KR is set to the replace recording mode. Record the performance using the procedures described in Chapter 4 (p. 89), Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts
(16-Track Sequencer) (p. 113). Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Layering a Recording Over Previously Recorded Sounds
(Mix Recording) You can record a performance layered over a previously recorded performance. This method is called Mix Recording. 1. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 116), select <Mix>. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen. Record the performance using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons
(Redoing Recordings) (p. 95), Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer) (p. 113), or other methods.
* After you have finished with mix recording, return to the usual replace recording mode. Repeated Recording at the Same Location (Loop Recording) You can record a specified passage over and over, layering sounds with each pass. This method is called Loop Recording. This is handy when recording a Rhythm Part. For example, use this method to make a Loop Recording of a four-measure segment. First record the bass drum, the snare drum next, then the hi-hat and so on, layering a different instrument onto the same four measures. After you have finished recording the four-measure rhythm pattern, you can then use the procedure in Copying Measures (Copy) (p. 122) to create as many copies of the four measures as you need to complete your Rhythm part. 1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the passage you want to record. Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice
(Marker) (p. 84). If you havent recorded anything yet, then use Blank Recording to create the necessary number of measures before placing the markers. C h a p t e r 7 117 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs What is Blank Recording?
Blank Recording is recording a number of silent measures with no content. 1. Set the basic tempo and beat of the song. 2. Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press the
(Play/Stop)] button.
(Rec)] and [
The indicators for the [
Stop)] buttons both light up, then after two measures of the count sound, recording begins. 3. Without performing anything, record only the required number of measures, then press the
(Play/
(Play/Stop)] button. The indicators for the [
Stop)] buttons both go out, and recording stops.
(Rec)] and [
(Play/
2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 116), select <Loop>. Press the [Exit] button to return to the menu screen. The recording method changes to loop recording. 3. Press the [
4. Press the Track button for the track to be recorded.
(Rec)] button. The KR is put in recording standby. 5. Press the [
recording.
(Play/Stop)] button to begin 7 r e t p a h C Recording starts from Marker A. When the song reaches Marker B, it then returns to Marker A, where recording continues. Each time the recording is looped, the newest sounds are layered over previously recorded sounds. 6. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording stops.
* After you have finished with loop recording, return to the usual replace recording mode (p. 116). 118 Loop Recording Shortcut You can also use the method described below to set Loop Recording. 1. Place A and B markers at the beginning and end of the passage you want to record. Take a look at Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker) (p. 84). If you havent recorded anything yet, then perform Blank Recording for the necessary number of measures before placing the markers. 2. Touch the <Repeat> icon in the Marker screen
(p. 84). This sets the loop recording mode. Start a recording.
* After you have finished with loop recording, touch the
<Repeat> icon in the Marker screen once more to return to the usual replace recording mode. Re-Recording Part of Your Performance (Punch-in Recording) You can re-record part of a passage as you listen to a recorded performance. This recording method is called Punch-in Recording. This convenient function lets you record over a specified points in a part as you listen to a prerecorded performance in another section. User Punch-In Recording by the following two methods:
Recording the Region Defined by Markers A and B
(Auto Punch-In/Out) Before you start recording, place markers A and B to define the passage you want to re-record. Make the setting for punch-in recording, and re-record just the passage between markers A and B. Recording From the Point at Which the Pedal or Buttons Are Pressed (Manual Punch-In/Out) You can play back a performance and depress the pedal at the desired place to start re-recording. Depressing the pedal a second time cancels recording and returns you to playback. Instead of pressing the pedal, you can press a performance pad or the[
cancel recording.
(Rec)] button to start and Recording a Passage Specified by Markers 1. Before you start re-recording, place markers A and B to define the passage. Following the procedures described in Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker) (p. 84), use Markers A and B to specify the passage. The previously recorded performance will be played back. Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs 2. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 116), select <Auto Punch-In/
Out>. fig.d-rec-punch.eps_50 This changes the recording mode to Punch-In Recording. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen. 3. Begin recording. Begin recording using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings) (p. 95) or Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer) (p. 113). Up until the specified passage, the previously recorded performance plays back. When you reach the specified passage, sounds are erased as recording starts; begin playing now. When you reach the end of the specified passage, recording stops, and the KR returns to playback of the previously recorded performance. 4. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the song stops. Starting Recording from the Measure Specified by Buttons and Pedals If using the Performance Pads or pedals, you must first change the function of the pedals and Pads. Follow the procedures in Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User Functions) (p. 142), and assign <Auto Punch-In/Out> to the buttons or pedal. 1. In the Rec Mode screen (p. 116), select <Manual Punch-
In/Out>. This changes the recording mode to Punch-In Recording. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen. 2. Begin recording. Begin recording using the procedures described in Recording While Selecting the Track Buttons (Redoing Recordings) (p. 95) or Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer) (p. 113). Press the pedal to which Punch In/Out is assigned (p. 139), a performance pad, or the [[
(Rec)]] button to begin recording, then start your performance. Recording stops when you press the pedal, the Performance Pad, or the [
the previously recorded performance is played back.
(Rec)] button again, and 3. When you press the [
performance stops.
(Play/Stop)] button, the
* When youre finished with Punch-In Recording, return to the ordinary Replace Recording mode. Take a look at Changing the Recording Method (p. 116). C h a p t e r 7 119 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Composing an Accompaniment By Entering Chords (Chord Sequencer) You can enter a chord progression and choose the places where the accompaniment pattern will change to create an accompaniment for a song. This feature is called Chord Sequencer. Thanks to the chord sequencer, you can create an accompaniment ahead of time and play along with your right hand. 1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up. The Menu screen appears. 2. Touch <Chord Sequencer>. The screen like the one shown below is called Chord Sequencer screen. fig.d-chordseq.eps_50 This is the cursor. The cursor shows where the chord change or other information is input. This is the end of the song. When continuing to add input, insert measures by touching <Ins>. 7 r e t p a h C This indicates the position where the accompaniment pattern (Division) or the Style Orchestrator changes. Display Explanation Ins Del Chords One measure is inserted before the measure where the cursor is positioned. The measure in which the cursor is positioned is deleted. Allows input of chords without playing the keyboard. Refer to Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard (p. 121). All Clear Deletes all of the data thats been input. Clear Deletes the data at the cursor position. Execute Records the input chord progression. Touch this icon when you have finished inputting all of the chords. 3. Press a Music Style button or the touch screen to select a Music Style (p. 50). 4. Press the [Exit] button. 120 You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen. 5. Enter the chord progression and the accompaniment pattern. Refer to Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer. 6. When you have finished inputting all the data, touch
<Execute>. The accompaniment youve composed is registered at 0:
New Song. When storage of the data is complete, return to the Menu screen. Now, press the [
playing the melody along with the accompaniment you created.
(Play/Stop)] button, and try
* Songs youve created are discarded as soon as you turn off the power. If you do not want to delete the song, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory. Refer to Saving Songs (p. 101). Inputting Chords with the Chord Sequencer Change the accompaniment arrangements Move the cursor Select the accompaniment pattern (Division) 1. Use the dial to move the cursor to the input position. Use the [
the cursor one measure at a time.
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move 2. Enter the chord progression and the changes in the accompaniment pattern and arrangement. Just as when performing with Automatic Accompaniment, press the keys to specify a chord, and press a button to select the accompaniment pattern (p. 57). You can change the Style Orchestrator with the Performance Pads (p. 58). 3. Touch <Ins> once to insert one measure before the measure where the cursor is currently positioned. If you touch <Del>, the measure where the cursor is currently positioned is deleted, while the measures that follow are moved forward. To remove what you have input, move the cursor to the position with input you want to delete, then touch
<Clear>. This deletes the entered setting. You can only insert an intro at the beginning of a song. When you add an intro, the number of bars corresponding to the length of the intro is inserted automatically. Functions That Can Be Assigned to the Pedals and the Performance Pads For instructions on assigning functions, refer to Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/
User Functions) (p. 142). Inputting a short Intro and Ending Assign Intro 2/Ending 2" to a pedal or pad. Inputting a Variation or Original without a Fill-In Assign Original/Variation to a pedal or pad. Using the keyboard to input slash chords (such as Fm/C) Assign Leading Bass to a pedal or pad. Inputting a break somewhere within the song Assign Break to a pedal or pad. Insert half fill-ins (fill-ins lasting half a measure) Assign Half Fill In to a pedal or pad. Check the accompaniment you inserted Heres how to play back as much of the accompaniment as you have input. 1. Press the [
(Reset)] button to return to the beginning of the song. 2. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the performance is played back. 3. Playback stops when you press the [
(Play/Stop)]
button once more. Inputting Chords without Playing the Keyboard You can use <Chords> at the bottom right of the Chord Sequencer screen to specify chords on the screen. 1. At the Chord Sequencer screen, touch <Chords>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-chordinput.eps_50 2. Touch 3. Touch <Execute> to enter the chord. in each to specify the chords. You are returned to the Chord Sequencer screen. Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Editing Songs There are many ways you can edit performances recorded using the KR Track button or 16-track sequencer. Basic Operation of the Editing Functions
* While songs are being loaded, the measure number in the upper right of the screen is highlighted (text and background are inverted). Start editing the song only after the measure number is no longer highlighted. Selecting the editing function 1. Press the [Menu] button and watch the indicator light up. The Menu screen appears. 2. Touch <Song Edit>. A Song Edit screen like the following appears. fig.d-edit1.eps_50 3. Touch an editing function to select that function. For more detailed information, refer to the corresponding page for each function. Function Explanation Undo Copy Quantize Delete Insert Transpose Erase Part Exchange Note Edit PC Edit Undoes editing operations that have been performed. Copies measures and internal rhythm patterns. Evens out sounds in recorded performances. Deletes measures. Inserts a blank measure. Transposes parts individually. Erases data in measures, creating blank measures. Page p. 122 p. 122, p. 137 p. 123 p. 123 p. 124 p. 124 p. 125 Exchanges the sounds in parts. p. 125 Allows corrections to be made note by note. Allows editing of the Tones changes that occur during a song. p. 126 p. 126 121 C h a p t e r 7 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs PC stands for Program Change, which is a command that tells an instrument to change the sound its using. With songs that rely on the use of a variety of sounds, a PC needs to be located at every point within the song where the Tone is to be changed Copying Measures (Copy) You can copy a portion of a performance to a different bar in the same Part or to a measure in another Part. This is handy when youre composing a song that repeats a similar phrase. fig.e-copy.e
* Some edits cant be undone, not even by choosing Undo. We Ex. To copy measures 5-7 to measure 8. recommend saving songs to floppy disks or to user memory before editing. For more on how to save songs, refer to Saving Songs
(p. 101). Editing 4. Touch the item to be edited. The background of the item being set turns orange. 5. Set the value with the [-] [+] buttons or the dial. To cancel the operation once it is underway, press the
[Exit] button. 6. When youre done making all the settings, touch
<Execute>. When you are finished editing the setting, return to the Song Edit screen. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen. You can play back edited songs by pressing the [
(Play/
Stop)] button in the Song Edit screen. Undoing Edits (Undo) You can cancel an editing operation that youve just carried out. This is handy when you want to undo an edit and restore data to the way it was before. 7 r e t p a h C
* There are some edits that cant be restored. At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<Undo>. Editing functions that can be undone appear on screen. fig.d-e-undo.eps_50 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 9 10 At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<Copy>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-e-copy.eps_50 Item Content From For Src To Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be copied Number of measures to be copied Copy-source Track button or part number Choosing All copies all Parts. - - - appears in the <Dst> column. If you choose a Track button, you can only copy to the selected Track button. You cannot copy to the other Track buttons. Copy-destination measure number When End is selected, the data is copied to the end of the song. Times Number of times the data is to be copied Dst Copy-destination part number If you touch <Cancel>, the undo is cancelled, and youre returned to the Song Edit screen. If you touch <OK>, the confirmation message appears on screen. Touch <OK> to undone the most recent edit. Mode 122 Data can be copied in the following three ways:
Replace If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination, this previous recording is erased, and the copied data is written in its place. Mix If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination, the copied data is layered over the previous recording. If the Tones used for the copy source and copy destination are different, the copy-destination Tone is used. Item Content Item Content Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Mode Insert If there is a performance recorded at the copy destination, the copied portion is inserted without erasing the previous recording. The song is lengthened by the number of inserted measures. Correcting Timing Discrepancies (Quantize) You can correct for timing discrepancies in a recorded performance by automatically aligning the music with the timing you specify. This is called Quantizing. As an example, lets say that the timing of some quarter-
notes in a performance is a little off. In this case, you can quantize the performance with quarter-note timing, thus making the timing accurate. fig.e-quantize.e Example: Quarter-note resolution Actual note data 1 Note data after quantization Example: Sixteenth-note resolution Actual note data 1 Note data after quantization 2 2 3 3 4 4 At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<Quantize>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-e-quant.eps_50 Item From For Tr/Pt Content Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be quantized Number of measures to be quantized Track button or part number to be quantized Choosing All quantizes the same passage in all Parts. Resolution Quantization timing Select one of the following values 1/2 (half note), 1/4 (quarter note), 1/6 (quarter-note triplet), 1/8 (eighth note), 1/12 (eighth-note triplet), 1/16 (sixteenth note), 1/24 (sixteenth-note triplet), 1/32 (thirty-second note) When finished with the Quantize settings, return to the Song Edit screen. Deleting Measures (Delete) You can delete a part of a performance measure by measure. When a portion of a performance is deleted, the rest of the performance is shifted up to fill the gap. Erasing measures in a specified passage is called deleting. fig.e_delete.e Ex. To delete measures (bars) 5-8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 8 9 10 At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<Delete>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-e-del.eps_50 C h a p t e r 7 Item Content From For Tr/Pt Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be deleted Number of measures to be deleted Track button or part number to be deleted When All is selected, the same portion of all parts is deleted. 123 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Inserting Blank Measures
(Insert) You can add a blank measure at a location you specify. This addition of a blank measure is called insertion. fig.e_insert.e Ex. To insert measures (bars) 5-7 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 9 10 At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<Insert>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-e-ins.eps_50 Item Content From For Tr/Pt Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be inserted Number of measures to be inserted Track button or part number where data will be inserted When All is selected, blank measures are inserted at the same place in all parts. 7 r e t p a h C Transposing Individual Parts
(Transpose) You can transpose specified parts and tracks individually. At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<Transpose>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-e-trans.eps_50 Item Content From For Tr/Pt Bias Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be transposed Number of measures to be transposed Track button or part number to be transposed When All is selected, the same portion of all parts is transposed. The range of transposition You can select the range to transpose the data, from -24 (two octaves down) to +24 (two octaves up), adjustable in semitones.
* You cannot transpose performances of the drum sets and sound effect sets (such as the Rhythm Track). 124 Making Measures Blank
(Erase) You can delete the performance data in a specified block of measures, turning them into blank measures without reducing the length of the song. This process is called erasing. fig.e_erase.e Ex. To erase measures (bars) 5-8 1 1 2 2 3 3 4 4 5 5 6 6 7 7 8 8 9 9 10 10 Blank measures Follow the steps in Selecting the editing function (p. 121) to choose <Erase>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-e-erase.eps_50 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Item Content Event Expression Erases Expression (volume change) information. Lyric Erases only lyrics. Exchanging Parts
(Part Exchange) You can exchange the notes recorded for a particular part with the notes recorded for another part. This process of exchanging parts is called part exchange. At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<Part Exchange>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-e-partex.eps_50 Touch each exchange. to choose Parts you want to Item Content From For Tr/Pt Event Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be erased Number of measures to be erased Track button or part number to be erased When All is selected, the same portion of all parts is erased. Select from the following types of performance data to erase:
All All performance data, including notes, tempos, tones switches, volume changes, etc., are erased. Tempo Tempo data is erased. Erasing the tempo data for all measures results in a single, constant tempo. Prog.Change Erases the data for switching Tones (p. 122). Note Erases only notes. Except Notes Erases all of the performance data except for the notes. C h a p t e r 7 125 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Correcting Notes One by One
(Note Edit) You can make corrections in a recorded performance one note at a time. This process of making changes in individual notes is called note editing. You can make these corrections by using note editing:
Deleting misplayed notes Changing the scale of a single note Changing the force used in playing a single key (velocity) Change the fingering At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<Note Edit>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.e-note.e Modifying the Tone Changes in a Song (PC Edit) In some songs, the instrument sound changes during the course of the song (that is, the Tone changes in the middle of a Part). In such songs, an instruction to switch the Tone is inserted at the place where you want the sound to change. This instruction is called a Program Change (PC), and actions such as deleting program changes, or changing the selected Tone by them are called PC editing.
It is not possible to insert a program change into a measure or beat that does not contain a program change. At Step 3 of Selecting the editing function (p. 121), select
<PC Edit>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-e-pc.eps_50 Location Tone name The PC-location display uses Measure: Beat: Tick as the format. A tick is a unit of time thats shorter than a beat. Touch change to be edited. to select the part with the program The Part number appears at the top of the screen. Use the [
use <
program change to be edited.
(Bwd)] button and the [
> in the upper part of the screen to find the
(Fwd)] button or When youve found the Program Change you want to modify, touch Tone Name on the screen. Press a Tone button to select a Tone group, then select a Tone with the [-] [+] buttons and the dial. When selecting Part 10 or 11, select the drum set or effect sound. If you want to delete the Program Change, touch <Delete>. When youre done making all the settings, press the [Exit]
button. Location Pitch Velocity The note-location display uses Measure: Beat: Tick as the format. A tick is a unit of time thats shorter than a beat. Touch corrected. The Part number appears at the top of the screen. to select the part with the note to be Use the [
use <
note to be corrected.
(Bwd)] button and the [
> in the upper part of the screen to find the
(Fwd)] button or 7 r e t p a h C When youve found the note you want to correct, touch Pitch or Velocity for the note. Use the [-] [+] buttons and the dial to correct the pitch or velocity. If you want to delete the note, touch <Delete>. When youre done making all the settings, press the [Exit]
button. Return to the Song Edit screen. 126 Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs Changing the Beat in the Middle of a Song (Beat Map) Changing the Tempo of Recorded Songs You can create songs that have beat changes during the course of the song.
* You cant change a songs beat once its been recorded. Before recording the performance, determine the beat to be used. 1. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. 2. Touch <Beat Map>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-beatmap.eps_50
(Bwd)]
> in the screen or the [
(Fwd)] buttons to move to the measure 3. Use <
and [
whose beat you want to change. The measure number appears in the top-right area of the screen. Touch <
Touch <
> to move to the beginning of the song.
> to move to the end of the song. 4. Touch 5. Touch <Execute>. in each to set the beat. The beat change starts with the measure you selected. Repeat Steps 35 to make beat settings in other measures as needed. Recording the performance 6. Press the [Exit] button twice. The screen displayed before you pressed the [Menu]
button appears. You can change the basic tempo of a composition. The basic tempo was initially set when the song was recorded. 1. Press the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons to choose a tempo. 2. Hold down the [
(Rec)] button and press the
(Reset)] button. The songs basic tempo changes. The change in basic tempo is discarded when you turn off the power or choose a different song. Save important song data to floppy disks or to user memory (p. 101).
If the song youre working on has tempo changes, press the
(Reset)] button to go back to the beginning of the song before you carry out this operation. Changing the Tempo Within the Song You can add tempo changes to a recorded composition. The KR stores song tempo information and performance data separately. Therefore, when making changes to the tempo in a song, you must record the changes in the tempo information independently of the performance data. This recording of the tempo is called Tempo Recording. Adjusting the Tempo While Listening to a Song You can add ritardando and other such gradual tempo changes. C h a p t e r 7 Setting the Rec Mode to Tempo 1. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. 2. Touch <Rec Mode>. A screen like the one shown below appears. 7. Press the [
(Reset)] button to return the measure fig.d-rec-tempo.eps_50 number to 1. 8. Start a recording. Record the performance using the procedures described in Chapter 5 Recording and Saving the Performance
(p. 89). Specify the measure, then change the beat. 127 Adjusting the Tempo at a Particular Measure You can create a tempo change at the beginning of a selected measure. This is handy when you want to make a sudden change in tempo. First, carry out Steps 13 of Changing the Tempo Within the Song (p. 127) to make the Tempo Recording settings. 1. Use the [
(Fwd)] buttons to move to the measure where you want to change the tempo.
(Bwd)] and [
The measure number appears in the top-right area of the Basic screen. 2. Press the [
flashing.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is The KR is put in recording standby. 3. Use the [-] [+] buttons or the dial to change the tempo. 4. Press the [
(Play/Stop)] button. The songs tempo changes starts with the measure you selected. While tempo recording is being used to write tempo, the tempo display in the screen will be highlighted. 5. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, the change in tempo stops.
* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording mode. When youre finished tempo recording, go back to the ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at Changing the Recording Method (Rec Mode) (p. 116). If you want to restore the previous tempo, delete the tempo data at the place where the tempo was recorded. For an explanation of how to delete the information of tempo settings, refer to Making Measures Blank (Erase) (p. 125). Tempo Recording Shortcut
(Rec)] button and press one of the Hold down the [
Tempo [-] [+] buttons to switch to the Tempo Recording settings. Record tempo information. In this case, tempo recording is canceled when recording ends. Chapter 7 Creating and Editing Songs 3. Touch the <Rec Mode>
to select <Tempo>. This makes the setting for tempo recording. Press the [Exit] button a number of times to switch to the screen where the measure number is indicated in the upper right of the screen. When the KR goes into Tempo Recording, the tempo indication is highlighted. Recording the Tempo 4. Use the [
(Bwd)] and [
(Fwd)] buttons to move slightly before the measure where you want to change the tempo. 5. Press the [
flashing.
(Rec)] button and watch the indicator is The KR is put in recording standby. 6. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording begins. 7. When you get to the place where you want to change the tempo, use the Tempo [-] and [+] buttons or the dial to vary the tempo as desired. 8. When you press the [
(Play/Stop)] button, recording stops. The songs tempo changes.
* You cannot record performances while in Tempo Recording mode. When youre finished tempo recording, go back to the ordinary Replace Recording. Take a look at Changing the Recording Method (Rec Mode) (p. 116). 7 r e t p a h C 128 Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Creating Original Styles
(User Styles) Although the KR features a variety of internal Music Styles, you can also create your own. These original Styles are called User Styles. You can use either of the two methods described below to create a User Style. Style Composer With this method, you combine internal Music Styles to create new Styles. You can create a new Style by selecting from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4, Accompaniment 5, and Accompaniment 6 parts in different styles. Style Converter (p. 131) Create a new Style by extracting the portions you need from songs composed with the 16-track sequencer. When youre composing a song, theres no need to specify all the chords. You can specify just some of the chords, and the KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the Style. Style Converter features an Auto mode that allows you to easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a Manual mode, in which you create Styles from songs with three kinds of chordsmajor, minor, and seventh chords. Creating New Styles by Combining Internal Music Styles (Style Composer) You can create a new style by selecting from among the Rhythm, Bass, Accompaniment 1, Accompaniment 2, Accompaniment 3, Accompaniment 4, Accompaniment 5,and Accompaniment 6 parts in different Styles. This function is called the Style Composer.
* You can only combine the KRs built-in Styles. Displaying the Style Composer Screen 1. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. fig.d-menu1.eps_50 2. Touch <Style Composer>.
If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the one shown below appears. fig.m-styledel.eps Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Save User Styles to floppy disks, or to user memory (p. 134). When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is deleted, and a new User Style is created. C h a p t e r 8 129 Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles A Style Composer screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-stylecomp.eps_50 Display Part R B A1 A2 A3 A4 A5 A6 Rhythm Bass Accompaniment 1 Accompaniment 2 Accompaniment 3 Accompaniment 4 Accompaniment 5 Accompaniment 6 Icon Function All Clear Deletes all of the settings. You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific Divisions. For more information, take a look at Muting Parts for a particular division (p. 130). Selecting the Styles assigned to each part 3. Touch the part to be set. The button for the touched part being set turns orange. 4. Press an Music Style button, then select a Style with the touch screen or the [-]/[+] buttons and the dial. When you have decided on a Style, press the [Exit]
button to display the Style Composer screen. 5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 to determine the Styles for each Part. Deciding on a Style 6. Touch <Execute>. You have created a new Style. The User Style is recorded to the Music Style [User]
button. Try playing with the new Style.
If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User Style youve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to delete the Style, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory. Take a look at Saving a User Style (p. 134). Muting Parts for a particular division You can mute the sound of particular Parts in specific Divisions. For example, all parts are played when you use a Variation accompaniment pattern, whereas if you select the Original accompaniment pattern, every part other than Accompaniment 1" is muted. With this arrangement, when the accompaniment pattern changes from the original to the variation, it creates a more elaborate effect in the accompaniment. For more on Divisions, refer to the Style Arrangements (p. Deletes the Styles in selected parts. 131). The Part Settings screen is displayed, allowing you to make detailed settings to each part. For more information, take a look at Editing the volume and effect settings for each Part (p. 131). Records the created Style to the Music Style [User] button. Touch this when you have finished creating the Style. 1. Touch the Style Composer screen to choose the Part you want to mute out. 2. Press the Fill In [To Variation] or [To Original] button to switch to the division that you want to mute. 3. Touch <Mute> on the screen. The Part you chose is only muted out in the Division you selected. If you want to hear the muted-out Part, touch <Mute>
again.
* To mute out a Division that changes after a few seconds (intro, ending, or fill-in), touch <Mute> immediately after switching to the Division. Mute Clear Options Execute 8 r e t p a h C 130 Editing the volume and effect settings for each Part Displaying the Part settings screen 1. At the Style Composer screen, touch <Part>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-scomp-part.eps_50 Modifying the settings of each part 2. Touch the to select the part with the settings to be changed. The part name and Tone name are indicated in the upper part of the screen. 3. Touch for each parameter to change the value. You can also change the values by touching each parameter name and then using the dial. Display Explanation Volume Adjusts the volume. Reverb Chorus Adjusts the amount of reverb effect applied to the sound. Adjusts the amount of chorus effect applied to the sound. Changes the left-right direction from which the sound appears to come. Panpot When you touch
, the sound moves to the right; touch the left. to move the sound to You can change the Tone for the selected Part by pressing a Tone button to change the Tone while this screen is displayed. When selecting Rhythm Part, you can touch <Drum Set> to select the drum set or effect sound. Finishing the settings 4. Press the [Exit] button. The Style Composer screen appears. Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Creating a Style from a Song You Composed Yourself
(Style Converter) You can take a song youve composed yourself and extract the portions you need to create your own original Style. When youre composing a song, theres no need to specify all the chords. You can specify some of the chords, and the KR automatically chooses the other chords and arranges the style. This function is called the Style Converter. Style Converter features an Auto mode that allows you to easily create Styles from songs with a single chord, and a Manual mode, in which you create Styles from songs with three kinds of chordsmajor, minor, and seventh chords. When creating a song in order to create an music style, its good practice to consider the arrangement of the music style. Style Arrangements Music Styles created with the Style Converter function are composed of eight parts: Rhythm, Bass,Accompaniment 1,Accompaniment 2, Accompaniment 3,Accompaniment 4,Accompaniment 5, Accompaniment 6. A song progresses in predictable a sequence, such as intro, melody A, melody B, bridge and ending. With the KR, such changes in songs are allocated to the following six performance states. We call these six parts of a song Divisions. Division Performance division Intro Ending Original Variation Fill-In To Variation Fill-In To Original The intro is played at the start of a song. This is played at the end of a song. This is a basic accompaniment pattern. This is a developmental accompaniment pattern. It is a variation on an Original. This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes. It is used to make a song more lively. This is a one-measure phrase inserted at a juncture where the mood changes. It is used to make a song more sedate. C h a p t e r 8 You can make a song more lively or more restrained by increasing or reducing played parts by Divisions. You can also modify a song by changing the Tone of the parts in the Divisions. 131 Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Creating Styles in Auto Mode Points to note when creating songs Use one of the major, minor, or diminished seventh chords to create the song. We recommend using diminished seventh chords to compose the song. It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for the Parts of the 16-track sequencer. Rhythm Bass Accomp Accomp Accomp D (10) 2 1 7 2 8 3 9 When using parts other than Part 2, 7, 8, 9, and D, refer to Changing an Extracted Part (p. 133). Creating songs 1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song. Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer) (p. 113) and other related sections. When using music data, first select a song (p. 64). Displaying the Style Converter screen 2. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. 3. Touch <Style Converter>.
If no song for use in creating a new Style is selected, the message Please select a song appears. Use the [Select/Listen to a Song] button to select a song (p. 64), then start the procedure again. If a User Style has already been recorded, a message like the one shown below appears. fig.m-styledel.eps Touch <Cancel> to return to the Menu screen. Please save the User Style on a floppy disk or in the internal memory (p. 134). When you touch <OK>, the previously recorded User Style is deleted, and a new User Style is created. A Style Converter screen like the one shown appears. 8 r e t p a h C 132 fig.d-styleconv.eps_50 Parameter Name Settings Content Conv.Mode Switches the mode (Auto/Manual) Chord Root Chord Type Chord root for the segment to be extracted Chord type for the segment to be extracted (major/minor/seventh) Division Division From For Measure number of the first measure of the segment to be extracted Number of measures extracted Making the settings 4. Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or the dial to switch the mode to Auto. This makes the setting for the Auto mode. 5. Touch <Chord Root> and <Chord Type>, then use the dial to input the chord root and type for the segment to be extracted. 6. Touch <Division>, then use the dial to select the Division. Display Performance division Intro Intro Original Original accompaniment pattern Fill To Vari From the fill-in to the variation Variation Variation accompaniment pattern Fill To Ori From the fill-in to the original Ending Ending
* Only one measure can be extracted when Fill To Vari or Fill To Ori is selected for the Division. The number of measures may also be limited in other Divisions. 7. Touch <From> and <For>, then use the [-] [+] buttons or the dial to select the measures to be extracted. Creating songs 1. Use the 16-track sequencer to record the song. Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Touching <Play> at the bottom of the screen, you can listen to performance of the portion which you chose. 8. Repeat Steps 57 to create Styles for all of the Divisions.
If no setting is made for a Division, it uses a simple drum pattern. Deciding on a Style 9. When youre done making all the Division settings, touch <Execute>. The User Style is recorded to the [User] button.
If you turn off the power or record a new User Style, any User Style youve previously recorded is lost. If you do not want to delete the Style, save it to a floppy disk or to user memory. Take a look at Saving a User Style (p. 134).
* The following data is saved to the User Style. If a song includes data other than this, the results you get might not be what was intended. Keyboard performance data Amount of Reverb effect applied Amount of Chorus effect applied Creating a Style in Manual Mode When you create a Music Style in the Manual mode, you can clearly point up the differences in accompaniment for each individual chord. Points to note when creating songs Record your performance with the three chord types of diminished seventh, major, and minor. It is convenient to record the sounds shown below for the Parts of the 16-track sequencer. Chords Rhythm Bass Major D (10) Seventh Minor
3 2 12 Accomp Accomp Accomp 1 4 7 13 2 5 8 14 3 6 9 15 The chords all share the same Rhythm Part. If you want to use the performance of other part, check out Record the song after referring to Multitrack Recording with 16 Parts (16-Track Sequencer) (p. 113) and other related sections. When using music data, first select a song (p. 64). Displaying the Style Converter screen 2. Press the [Menu] button. 3. Touch <Style Converter>. The Style Converter screen appears. 4. Touch <Conv.Mode>, then use the dial to switch the mode to Manual. This makes the setting for the Manual mode. After that, the steps are the same as for Creating Styles in Auto Mode (p. 132). When you touch <Play> in the lower part of the screen, you can listen to the performance of the part selected with <Options>. Changing an Extracted Part You can extract and change part of a song created with 16-
track sequencer. 1. At the Style Converter screen (p. 132), touch <Part>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-styleconv.eps_50 C h a p t e r 8 2. Touch the performance Part with settings you want to change. 3. Use the dial to specify which 16-track Sequencer performance part you want to extract. Changing an Extracted Part (p. 133) In the Manual mode, the type of chords appear at the bottom of the screen. Set the Parts for all chords. 4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Style Converter screen. The Style Converter screen appears. 133 Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Saving a User Style fig.d-stylesave.eps_50 You can save the User Styles you create to floppy disks and the user memory. When saved to the user memory, User Styles are not deleted when the power is turned off. You can also select Styles saved to the user memory by pressing the Music Style [User] button. You can save up to 99 User Styles in user memory. What is the User Memory?
The user memory is the area within the instrument where User Styles created with the KR, sets of User Programs, and other such data are stored. You can also copy User Styles and sets of User Programs saved on floppy disks. Data saved to the user memory is not deleted, even when the KRs power is turned off. When you want to clear all of the content saved to the user memory and restore the settings to the factory settings, refer to Formatting the User Memory (p. 150). Preparations for saving data When saving to an external memory, first connect a external memory to the external memory port. 1. Press the Music Style [User] button. A User Style screen like the following appears. fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50 8 r e t p a h C If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in the lower part of the screen. 2. Touch <User>. 3. Touch <File>. 4. Touch <Save>. A Save Style screen like the following appears. NOTE This function is not available with songs on CDs. 134 Determining the name of the Style to be saved 5. Touch <Rename>. A Rename screen like the following appears. fig.d-stylename.eps_50 When you touch
, the cursor moves. When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the character appears at the cursor position. For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group (ABCA...). Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through English (upper case), English (lower case), numerals, symbols, then back to English (upper case). When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted. When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position. 6. When you have finished with the name, press the [Exit]
button. Determining the save destination 7. Touch <Media>
to select the save-
destination strage media. to select the save-destination 8. Touch number. If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to that number. If you select a number with a previously saved User Style and then save to that number, the previously saved User Style is deleted. If you do not want to delete the User Style being saved, select a number in the save-
destination column that does not yet have a name. 9. Touch <Save>. The saving process starts. Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Deleting Saved User Styles This deletes User Styles that have been saved to floppy disks or in user memory. When deleting a User Style on a floppy disk, first insert the floppy disk in the disk drive. 1. Press the Music Style [User] button. A User Style screen appears. If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in the lower part of the screen. 2. Touch <File>. 3. Touch <Delete>.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external A Delete Style screen like the following appears. memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. fig.d-styledel.eps_50 4. Touch <Media>
media. 5. Touch or 6. Touch <Delete>. to select the strage to select the Style to be deleted. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.m-filedel.eps C h a p t e r 8 7. Touch <OK>. The selected Style is deleted. If you touch <Cancel>, the Style wont be deleted.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. 135 Chapter 8 Creating Music Styles Copying Styles on External Memories to the User Memory You can take User Styles saved on floppy disks and copy them to user memory. You can also take User Styles saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks. 1. Insert the floppy disk with the Style to be copied in the disk drive. 2. Press the [User] button. Specifying the Copy Destination 7. Touch <User>
to select the copy destination for the Style. If a Style name is displayed, a style is already saved to that number. If you select a number with a previously saved Style and then copy to that number, the previously saved Style is deleted. If you do not want to lose the Style being saved, select a number in the save-destination column that does not yet have a name. 8. Touch <Execute>. A User Style screen like the following appears. The Style on the floppy disk is copied to user memory.
* Never turn off the power or eject the external memory from the external memory port while the operation is in progress. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. Copying Styles Saved in the User Memory to External Memories You can take Styles saved in user memory and copy them to floppy disks. In this case, touch the large arrow icon in the center of the Copy Style screen in Step 4 above so that the arrow points upwards. Turn the KR will copy user memory Styles to the floppy disk. The rest of the procedure is identical to that used for copying Styles from floppy disks to user memory. fig.d-usrdisk.eps_50 If the User Style screen is not displayed, touch <User> in the lower part of the screen. 3. Touch <File>. 4. Touch <Copy>. A Copy Style screen like the following appears. fig.d-copystyle.eps_50 8 r e t p a h C Specifying the copy source 5. Touch <Media>
media. 6. Touch <File>
copy. to select the copy source to select the Style you want to When All is selected, all of the Styles on the floppy disk are copied to user memory. 136 Chapter 9 Various Settings Changing the Settings for One-Touch Arranger Procedure 1. Press the One Touch Program [Arranger] button to display the Basic screen. fig.d-arrbasic.eps_50 Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
(Key Touch) You can vary the touch of the keyboard when you play the keys. At Step 3 in Procedure (p. 138), touch <Key Touch>. fig.d-p-key.eps_50 2. Touch <Functions>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-funcmenu1.eps_50 Parameter Name Explanation Key Touch Refer to Adjusting the Keyboard Touch
(Key Touch) (p. 137). One Touch Setting Selects the setting to be specified when the One Touch Program [Arranger] button is pressed (p. 138). Split Point Sets the key at which the keyboard is divided
(the split point) (p. 138). Arranger Config. Sets the way the Automatic Accompaniment plays sounds (p. 138). You set the tuning and make a variety of other settings for the KR107 starting with the second page of the settings screen. 3. Touch the name of the parameter to be set. Refer to the corresponding page for each function. 4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Basic screen. Display Explanation Fixed Light Medium Heavy Notes sound at an unchanging volume level, regardless of how lightly or forcefully you play the keyboard. This sets the keyboard to a light touch. You can achieve fortissimo (ff) play with a less forceful touch than usual, so the keyboard feels lighter. This setting makes it easier for children, whose hands have less strength. This sets the keyboard to the standard touch. You can play with the most natural touch. This setting is closest to the response of an acoustic piano. This sets the keyboard to a heavy touch. You have to play the keyboard more forcefully than usual in order to play fortissimo (ff), so the keyboard touch feels heavier. This setting allows you to add more expression when playing dynamically. Touch any of the icons <Fixed>, <Light>, <Medium>, or
<Heavy>, to set the key touch for the keyboard. To make fine adjustments, touch the slider in the screen. Move the slider to the right to add resistance, and to the right to make the key touch lighter. You can also change the key touch by pressing the
[Piano Designer] button. For more details, refer to the Quick Start. C h a p t e r 9 137 Chapter 9 Various Settings Changing the Keyboards Split Point (Split Point) This sets the point (the split point) where the keyboard is divided when specifying chords in the left hand while using the Automatic Accompaniment and when playing split performances (p. 26). The setting is at F#3 when the KR is powered up. fig.splitpoint.e F 3 (Split Point) Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo
(One Touch Setting) Normally, when you select a Music Style, the Tone and tempo settings suitable for that Music Style are selected automatically. However, you can also set it so the tempo and Tone settings dont change when you change Music Styles. At Step 3 Procedure (p. 137), touch <One Touch Setting>. fig.d-1touchset.eps_50 B1 B6 Split Point Settings Range The key you chose for the split point belongs to the left-
hand section of the keyboard. At Step 3 in Procedure (p. 137), touch <Split Point>. fig.d-splitpoint.eps_50 Touch either <C3>, <F#3>, <C4>, or <F#4> in the lower part of the screen. The key you chose becomes the split point. To set another key as the split point, touch the screen, then specify the key. in You can set the split point within a range of B1 to B6. 9 r e t p a h C 138 Display Suitable Tone Suitable Tempo Other Setting Explanation The suitable tone for a Music Style is selected automatically. The suitable tempo for a Music Style is selected automatically. Other settings (Style Orchestrator, phrases, etc.) are changed automatically. Touch each icon to switch individual settings on and off. All items are set to ON when you turn on the power. Parameters switched to OFF (highlighted in orange) do not change, even when the Music Style is changed. Changing How Chords Are Played and Specified
(Arranger Config) This changes the settings determining how Music Styles are played, and how the keys are pressed to specify chords. What are the Chord Tone and Bass Tone?
When the Automatic Accompaniment is stopped, and Sync Start (p. 54) is turned off, chords are produced when you play in the left-hand side of the keyboard. This is called the chord tone, and the root of the chord that is played at the same time is called the bass tone. At Step 3 Procedure (p. 137), touch <Arranger Config>. fig.d-arrset.eps_50 How to play chords in the Chord Intelligence mode:
Chapter 9 Various Settings Touch of each item to make settings. Value Explanation All Music Style parts are played. Only Music Style rhythm parts, chord Tones, and bass Tones are played. Parame-
ter Name Accomp Bass Tone Chord Tone Accomp Chord&Bs OFF, Acoustic Bs., A. Bass+Cymbl, Fingered Bs., Picked Bs., Fretless Bs., Slap Bass, Organ Bass, Synth Bass 101, Thum Voice OFF, E.Piano 1, E. Piano 2, Soft E. Piano, Hard E. Piano, Slow Strings, Strings, Choir, Doos Voice Chord Intelli Intelligence 1, Intelligence 2, Manual This selects the way chords are played with the Chord Intelligence function. When you set this to Manual, play all of the notes describing the chord. What is Chord Intelligence?
Chord Intelligence (p. 47) is the name of the function that recognizes the chords being specified for an accompaniment when only one or two keys of the chords have been pressed, which can be used while automatic accompaniment is active. Selects the bass Tone or chord Tone. When set to Off, no tone is played. Diminished Ex:
C dim Intelligence 1 Major Ex:
C Seventh C 7 Ex:
Major Seventh Ex:
C maj 7 Minor Ex:
C m Minor Seventh Ex:
C m7 Intelligence 2 Major Ex:
C Seventh C 7 Ex:
Minor Ex:
C m Minor Seventh Ex:
C m7 Play the chord root. Play the root and the second key above it. Play the root and the first key below it. Play the root and the third key above it. Play the root, the third key above it, and the second key below it. Play the root and the sixth key above it. Play the root of the chord. Play the root of the chord and the white key to the left of the root. C h a p t e r 9 Play the root of the chord and the black key to the left of the root. Play the root of the chord and the black and white key to the left of the root. 139 Chapter 9 Various Settings Placing a Marker in the Middle of a Measure 2. Touch 3. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Metronome of each item to make settings. A marker is normally placed at the start of the selected measure, but you can also set it so that a marker is placed at a position partway through a measure. screen. fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50 For detailed information about Marker, refer to Setting Markers for Repeated Practice (Marker) (p. 84). 1. Press the [Count/Marker] button. The Count screen appears. 2. Touch <Marker>. The Marker screen appears. fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50 Parameter Name Value Count Mode Specify what type of count will be added. 3. Touch <Resolution>
to choose the marker setting. Countdown Sound Specify the countdown sound. Count In
(add a count before the performance), Countdown
(add a count only before you begin playing), Count In/down
(add both a count-in and a countdown) Voice (JP), Voice (ENG) Indication Explanation Measure Beat This lets you place a marker at the beginning of the measure. This lets you place a marker at the beginning of the beat. Part Specify the track or part that will determine the beginning of the performance when added a countdown. Both Tracks Lower Track Upper Track Part 116 4. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Marker screen. Count-In Sound Specify the count-in sound. Stick, Click, Electronic, Voice (JP), Voice (ENG), Wood Block, Triangle Castanets, Handclap Animal Changing the Settings for the Count 9 r e t p a h C For detailed information about count, refer to Match the Tempo Before You Begin Playing (Count) (p. 82) and Having a Count Sound Play at the End of the Intro
(Countdown) (p. 56). 1. Press the [Count/Marker] button. The Count screen (p. 43) appears. 140 Measures Specify the length (number of measures) of the count-in. 1, 2 Repeat When Repeat is turned ON on the Marker screen (p. 86) this specified whether the count-in will sound each time the range between the markers is repeated, or only the first time. First, Every Other Settings You can change the tuning, the language shown on the display, and other settings to make the KR easier to use. Procedure 1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. 2. Press the [Option] button. A Functions screen like the following appears. fig.d-funcmenu2.eps_50 When you press the [Option] button on the Basic screen, the first page displayed shows the parameters for the Automatic Accompaniment settings (p. 137). When you press the [Option] button on the Piano screen, the parameters for the piano performance settings continue into the second page (p. 138). Parameter Tuning Pedal Setting Master Tune External Display Language User Image Display Opening Message MIDI Setting Program Change Explanation Changing the tuning methods. Assigns functions to the pedal and performance pad (p. 142). Sets the KRs standard pitch (p. 145). Selects the content to be shown on the connected external display (p. 163). Selects the language used in the display (p. 145). Selects the image data and display used (p. 146). Sets the message that appears when the power is turned on (p. 147). Refer to p. 159. Refer to p. 159. Memory Backup MIDI Ensemble Factory Reset V-LINK Remote Control USB Driver Stores edited settings and other data to the KR (p. 147). Refer to p. 159. Restores the content stored with Memory Backup to the original factory settings (p. 148). Refer to p. 157. Changing the Functions of the Remote Controls Buttons (p. 148). Refer to p. 164. Chapter 9 Various Settings Parameter Remote Sensor Touch Screen Explanation Sets the remote sensors on or off(p. 149) Allows for calibration of the touch screen (p. 149). 3. Touch the name of the parameter you want to set. Refer to the corresponding page for each function. 4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen. Changing the Tuning (Tuning) Choosing the Tuning You can play classical styles such as Baroque using historic temperaments (tuning methods). Most modern songs are composed for and played in equal temperament, the most common tuning in use today. But at one time, there were a wide variety of other tuning systems in existence. By playing in the temperament that was in use when a composition was created, you can experience the sonorities of chords originally intended for that song. At Step 3 in Procedure (p. 138), touch <Tuning>. fig.d-p-temp.eps_50 You can choose from among the eight tunings described below. Tuning system Equal Just (Maj) Just (min) Characteristics This temperament divides the octave into 12 equal parts. All intervals will be slightly out of tune by the same amount. This setting is in effect when you turn on the power. C h a p t e r 9 This temperament makes the 5th and 3rd intervals pure. It is unsuited to playing melodies and cannot be transposed, but is capable of beautiful sonorities. Just intonation differs between major and minor keys. The same results as major can be obtained in a minor key. 141 Chapter 9 Various Settings Tuning system Arabic Kirnberger Pythagorean Meantone Werkmeister Characteristics This tuning is suitable for the music of Arabia. This temperament is a modification of meantone temperament and just intonation, allowing more freedom of modulation. Performances are possible in all keys (III). This temperament is based on the theories of the Greek philosopher Pythagoras, and has pure fourths and fifths. Chords containing a third will sound impure, but melodies will sound good. This temperament is a partial compromise of just intonation in order to allow modulation. This temperament is a combination of meantone and Pythagorean temperaments. It allows you to play in all keys. (First method, number three.) Touch any one of the icons to choose the tuning system. When playing in a temperament other than equal temperament, you must specify the tonic (the note corresponding to C for a major key, or to A for a minor key) of the key in which you will play. Touch <Key>
to select the tonic. Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User Functions) You can assign a variety of functions to the left and center pedals, the expression pedals, and the performance pads. You can call up the assigned functions just by pressing the corresponding pedal or pad. 925 NOTE Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit. Assigning Functions to Pedals At Step 3 Procedure (p. 137), touch <Pedal Setting>. fig.d-pedalset.eps_50 Touch NOTE to assign functions to each of the pedals. If you have selected equal temperament, it is not necessary to select the tonic. Pressing the One Touch Program [Piano] button restores the piano performance functions to the pedals (p. 18). 9 r e t p a h C Setting the Tuning Curve (Stretch Tuning) Pianos are generally tuned so that the low range is flatter and the high range is sharper than equal tempered pitches. This method of tuning is unique to the piano, and is known as stretched tuning. A graph that shows the changes in pitch of actual tuning compared with the changes in equal temperament pitch is called a tuning curve. Changing the tuning curve produces subtle variations in the reverberations of the chords you play. Touch the Stretch Tuning <ON> or <OFF> icon to select the tuning curve. When set to ON, the tuning curve features extended low and high ranges (Stretch Tuning). It is suitable for piano solos. This setting is selected when the power is turned on. When set to OFF, the standard tuning curve is used. It is suitable when playing in an ensemble with other instruments. 142 Assigning Functions to Performance Pads 1. Press the [User Function] button and watch the indicator light up. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-usrfunc.eps_50 2. Touch to assign functions to each of the Performance Pads. If you set the pedal as a dedicated switch for selecting User Programs, the function assigned to the pedal cannot be used. Refer to Using the Pedal to Switch User Programs (p. 111). Functions that can be assigned (Pedals, Performance Pads) Function Explanation Leading Bass No Chord Break Fill In to Variation Fill In to Original Fill In Toggles the Leading Bass function* on or off. The function stays on as long as the pedal to which this is assigned is pressed. When assigned to a Performance Pad, this is alternately switched on and off each time the pad is pressed. Only the Moving Keys Rhythm part is played. After No Chord is switched on, specifying a chord by playing the actual keys cancels the function, and all of the accompaniment parts are played. During the performance of Automatic Accompaniment, the accompaniment stops for one measure only. Performs the same function as the Fill In
[To Variation] button (p. 57). Performs the same function as the Fill In
[To Original] button (p. 57). A fill-in is inserted, but the accompaniment pattern after that doesnt change. Half Fill In to Variation Half Fill In to Original This plays a fill-in half a measure long, then switches to the Variation accompaniment pattern. This plays a fill-in half a measure long, then switches to the Original accompaniment pattern. Original/
Variation This changes the accompaniment pattern without inserting a fill-in. Arranger Reset Intro 1/
Ending 1 Intro 2/
Ending 2 Arranger Start/Stop Orchestrat or Up Orchestrat or Down When this function is used during Automatic Accompaniment, the accompaniment returns to the beginning of the Division (p. 46). Performs the same function as the [Intro/
Ending] button (p. 54). Intro 1 and Ending 1 are played. Performs the same function as the [Intro/
Ending] button (p. 54). Intro 2 and Ending 2 are played. Performs the same function as the [Start/
Stop] button (p. 54). This changes the accompaniment to a more elavorate arrangement (p. 58). Changes the accompaniment to a simpler arrangement (p. 58). Chapter 9 Various Settings Function Explanation Melody Intelligence Turns the Melody Intelligence function on and off (p. 59). Fade In/Out This starts Automatic Accompaniment with a fade-in (where the volume gets progressively louder), ends it with a fade-
out (where the volume gets progressively softer), then stops. Rotary Slow/Fast This switches the speed of the rotary effect*
when you perform with an organ Tone. Glide While the pedal or Performance Pad is held down, the pitch of the sound drops temporarily, returning to the original pitch when the pedal or Pad is released. This can be effective for simulating the performance of instruments like a Hawaiian guitar. Composer Play/Stop Performs the same function as the [
(Play/Stop)] button (p. 64). Page Fwd 1 Page Bwd 1 Page Fwd 2 Page Bwd 2 Press the pedal or the Pad turns the notation appearing on the KR display to the next page while the performance of a song is stopped. Press the pedal or the Pad turns the notation appearing on the KR display to the preceding page while the performance of a song is stopped. Press the pedal or the Pad turns the notation appearing on the external display to the next page while the performance of a song is stopped. Press the pedal or the Pad turns the notation appearing on the external display to the preceding page while the performance of a song is stopped. Punch In/
Out During Punch-in Recording, this starts and stops recording (p. 118). Tap Tempo You can set the tempo according to the interval at which the pedal or pad is pressed
(p. 81). C h a p t e r 9
* What is the leading bass function?
The function that sounds the lowest note of a fingered chord as the bass tone is called Leading Bass. When this function is turned on, the Bass Tone changes when chord inversions are used. Usually the tonic of the chord you play sounds as the bass tone.
* What is the rotary effect?
This adds a sort of spinning effect to the organ sound, similar to the sound when a rotary speaker is used. Changing the speed increases or decreases the speed of this spinning effect. 143 Chapter 9 Various Settings Functions that can be assigned (Pedals Functions that can be assigned (Expression Pedals Only) Function Expressio n Pedal Bend Up Explanation Adjusts the overall volume. This raises the pitch of notes you play on the keyboard. Bend Down This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the keyboard. Pedal EX1 When the pedal is pressed during a layer performance, the Tone volume changes between two levels, depending on how firmly the pedal is pressed. Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX1 selected increases the layer Tone volume. The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of how forcefully the keys are played. Pedal EX2 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX2 selected increases the layer Tone volume. Pedal EX3 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX3 selected increases the layer Tone volume, while the volume of the left-hand Tone is decreased. The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of how forcefully the keys are played. Pedal EX4 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX4 selected increases the layer Tone volume, while the volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased. Only) Function Replay Upper Soft Explanation Pressing the pedal during playback of a song stops the playback. When the pedal is released, playback resumes from the beginning of the measure that was playing when the pedal was pressed. When the pedal is pressed in rapid succession, the playback will resume backs up the same number of measures as the number of times the pedal is pressed. The pedal functions as a soft pedal (p. 18). Upper Sostenuto The pedal functions as a sostenuto pedal
(p. 18). Lower Damper Bend Up Bend Down Pedal EX1 Applies a damper pedal effect to the sounds in the left-hand side of the keyboard. This raises the pitch of notes you play on the keyboard. This lowers the pitch of notes you play on the keyboard. When the pedal is pressed during a layer performance, the Tone volume changes between two levels, depending on how firmly the pedal is pressed. Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX1 selected increases the layer Tone volume. The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of how forcefully the keys are played. Pedal EX2 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX2 selected increases the layer Tone volume. Pedal EX3 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX3 selected increases the layer Tone volume, while the volume of the left-hand Tone is decreased. The layer Tone is played at a fixed volume, regardless of how forcefully the keys are played. Pedal EX4 Pressing the pedal with Pedal EX4 selected increases the layer Tone volume, while the volume of the right-hand Tone is decreased. NOTE The effect may not be applied correctly when you press a pedal if Pedal EX14 is assigned to more than one pedal. Using the Bend Up or Bend Down function during a split performance (p. 25) changes the pitch of sounds in the right-hand side of the keyboard. Additionally, the range in which the pitch can change when the Bender effect is used is called the bend range; refer to Changing the Bend Range (Pedal Setting) (p. 145). 144 9 r e t p a h C Chapter 9 Various Settings Changing the Bend Range
(Pedal Setting) Changing the Language
(Language) The effect of smoothly raising or lowering the pitch of a played note is called the bender effect. Five choices are available for the language used in displaying information on the screen. You can assign the bender function to a pedal, then apply the bender effect by depressing and releasing the pedal. You can also make a setting that determines how much the pitch of the note changes when you apply the bender. The maximum range of change in pitch is called the bend range. At Step 3 Procedure (p. 137), touch <Pedal Setting>. fig.d-pedalset.eps_50 At Step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch <Language>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-lang.eps_50 Touch <Bend Range>
setting. to adjust the bend range You can set this to any value within a range of 1 to 12 (in half-tone steps, up to one octave). Changing Standard Pitch
(Master Tune) Standard pitch generally refers to the pitch that is heard when you play middle A. When performing in an ensemble with other instruments, adjust the standard pitch so that the instruments of the ensemble match. Tuning all the instruments to a standard pitch is called master tuning. At Step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch <Master Tune>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-tuning.eps_50 Touch to change the pitch. Standard pitch can be set to any value from 415.3466.2 Hz. Touch to select the language. Available settings English, Japanese, German, French, Spanish NOTE German, Spanish, and French are displayed for some functions. Other screens will be displayed in English. C h a p t e r 9 145 Chapter 9 Various Settings Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays
(User Image Display) You can have image data from computers and other devices shown on the onboard display, or on an external display youve connected. You can store two types of image data, KR-display-use data, and external-display-use data. KR-display-use images appear on the KRs display when the instruments power is turned on. Refer to the procedure in Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display (External Display) (p. 163) to set the instrument so the external-display-use image is displayed on the external display. At Step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch <User Image Display>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-usrimage.eps_50 fig.d-usrimage2.eps_50 3. Touch the name of the stored image data. When you touch <Preview>, you can then show the selected image data on the display selected in Step 1. 4. Touch <Save>. The selected image data is stored. 5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the previous screen. To clear the stored image data, touch <Erase>. Image data that KR can display Size 320 x 240 pixels (for KR display) 640 x 480 pixels (for external display) Color 1/4/8 bit (2/16/256 colors) BMP format Format
* The KR cannot deal with compressed image data. Selecting the display to be set 1. Touch <KR Display> or <Ext. Display>. Select the setting either for KR-display-use or external-display-use images. Name Selecting the images to be displayed First, take a floppy disk to which the image data stored in the KR has been saved, and insert the floppy disk in the disk drive. 2. Touch <File>. A screen like the one shown below appears. 9 r e t p a h C 18 characters in length (lowercase is ok). A filename extension of .BMP (uppercase characters) must be added after the name. The following characters can be used to name an image. A B C D E F G H I J K L M N O P Q R S T U V W X Y Z a b c d e f g h i j k l m n o p q r s t u v w x y z 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 # $ % & ( ) -
If you use a character that cannot be used in a name, it will be replaced by another character when displayed. 146 Changing the Screen Message When the Power Is Turned On
(Opening Message) You can modify this screen to show your favorite phrase when the power is turned on. At Step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch <Opening Message>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-openmsg.eps_50 Chapter 9 Various Settings Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off (Memory Backup) Normally, the various settings revert to their default values when the power is turned off. However, you can specify that the settings will be remembered even when the power is turned off. This function is called Memory Backup. For more on the settings stored using Memory Backup, refer to Parameters Stored in Memory Backup (p. 182). At step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch <Memory Backup>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-memory.eps_50 Use to move the cursor. When you touch the character icon, the character is input where at the position. When you touch the icon for the character to be input, the character appears at the cursor position. For example, touching the <ABC> icon in succession cycles you through the available choices in that character group (ABCA...). Each touch of <A-a-0-!> cycles the type of characters through English (upper case), English (lower case), numerals, symbols, then back to English (upper case). When you touch <Del>, the character at the cursor position is deleted. When you touch <Ins>, a space is inserted at the cursor position. When you have finished inputting the characters, touch
<Execute>. NOTE Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. If you touch <All Clear> at the bottom of the screen and then touch <Execute>, the display reverts to the screen that normally appears when you turn on the power to the instrument. Touch <Execute>. The confirmation message appears on screen. Touch <OK> to store the setting. When the setting has been stored in memory, the previous screen will reappear. NOTE Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. C h a p t e r 9 147 Chapter 9 Various Settings Restoring the Factory Settings
(Factory Reset) You can return the content stored with Memory Backup (p. 147) and the User Programs (p. 107) to their original factory settings. This operation is referred to as Factory Reset. NOTE When you perform a Factory Reset, all settings that have been stored in memory up to then are erased and reset to their factory defaults. This operation does not return the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory condition. To return the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings, refer to Returning the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings (p. 150) When you want to restore the content registered to the KRs User memory to the factory condition, refer to Formatting the User Memory (p. 150). At step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch Factory Reset. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-factory.eps_50 Touch <Execute>. The confirmation message appears on screen. Touch <OK> to restore the original factory settings. Changing the Functions of the Remote Controls Buttons You can change the functions assigned to the remote controls buttons. At step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch <Remocon Setting>. A screen like the one shown below appears. Changing the [
] (PLAY) Button Functions 6. Touch <PLAY>
to assign functions to
] (PLAY) button. Display Explanation All Song Songs are played back continuously in sequence, starting from the currently selected song. Internal Song Songs in the selected genre are played back continuously. Favorites Songs Songs registered to the Favorites are played back in sequence. Songs on External Memories Songs within the selected folder are played back continuously. One Song Only the selected song is played back. Playback stops when the song is finished. The songs are played back in random order. Internal Song The songs in all genres are played back in random order. Favorites Songs Songs registered to the Favorites are played back in random order. Songs on External Memories Songs within the selected folder are played back in random order. 9 r e t p a h C When the setting is changed, the previous screen returns. When you touch <Cancel>, the settings are left untouched, and youre returned to the previous screen. Random NOTE Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. 7. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen. 148 Changing the TEMPO [-] [+] Button and the TRANSPOSE [+] [-] Button Functions 4. Touch <TEMPO> or <TRANSPOSE>
to assign functions to TEMPO [-] [+] and TANSPOSE [-]
[+] button. Display Explanation Tempo Notation Transpose Bwd/Fwd Changes the tempo. Pressing [-] slows the tempo down; pressing [+] speeds up the tempo. Scrolls the score in the external display. Press [-] to return to the previous page;
press [+] to advance to the next page. Transposes the song. Pressing [-] lowers the pitch in semitone steps; pressing [+]
raises the pitch in semitone steps. Fast forwards and rewinds the song. When [-] is pressed, the song rewinds;
when [+] is pressed, the song is fast forwarded. 5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen. Changing the [FUNC1] [FUNC2] Button Functions 4. Touch <FUNC1> <FUNC2>
to assign functions to [FUNC1] [FUNC2] button. Display Explanation Track 3 Track 4 Pedal Zoom Repeat Each time the [FUNC] button is pressed, the left-hand track is switched on or off. When turned off, the sound from the left-
hand track does not play. Each time the [FUNC] button is pressed, the right-hand track is switched on or off. When turned off, the sound from the right-hand track does not play. Pressing the button while the song is playing back stops the playback. When you release the button, playback resumes from the beginning of the measure being played when you pressed the button. Pressing the button a number of times in rapid succession moves the playback position back by the same the number of measures, after which playback resumes. Displays an enlarged notation. Playback repeats within the marked range. 5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen. Chapter 9 Various Settings NOTE The remote control buttons original function assignments are restored when the power is turned off. If you want to save the changed settings, carry out the memory backup (p. 147). Switching the Remote Sensor On and Off (iR function) You set the Remote Sensor to On (active) or Off (disabled). When switched on, infrared transmission of song data and remote control information is received. At step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch iR function. A screen like the one shown below appears. Touch <ON> or <OFF>
Calibrating the Touch Screen
(Touch Screen) If youve been using the touch screen for some time, the pointer may be shifted, making the KR react incorrectly. You should correct this displacement when necessary by performing calibration (repositioning). At step 3 in Procedure (p. 141), touch Touch Screen. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50 C h a p t e r 9 Touch <Execute>. Touch the points indicated. NOTE Do this carefully, because touching a location thats different from the one indicated for the pointer may make the 149 Chapter 9 Various Settings displacement even worse. Be sure to touch the pointer accurately. When the calibration is finished, touch <Write> to store the settings. NOTE If you dont write them to memory, the calibration settings will be discarded as soon as the power is switched off. Returning the touch screen calibration settings to the original factory settings If you touch <Factory Reset> in the above screen, the touch screen calibration settings revert to the original factory settings. Selecting the Part to Which the Effect is Added
(EffectsPart) You may find effects not being applied to certain parts when different effects are applied to the right-hand tone, layer tone, and left-hand tone. In such instances, you can select which effect is to have priority. 1. Press any tone button, and select the tone (p.**). 2. Touch <Effect>. 3. Touch <Part>. 9 r e t p a h C 4. Touch added. to select the part which the effect is The effect will be applied to the selected part and other parts to which the same effect has been applied. 150 Formatting the User Memory The KR features an internal storage area where you can save recorded performances and User Styles. This space is called the User Memory. The following content is stored to the user memory. Content registered to the Favorites (p. 68) Sets of saved User Programs (p. 108) User Styles saved on user memory (p. 134) Image files set with the User Image settings (p. 146) To delete all of the content held in the user memory and restore the original factory settings, carry out the following procedure. 1. Press the [Song/File] button. 2. Touch <File>. 3. Touch <Format>. 4. Touch 5. Touch <Execute>. to select User Memory. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50 6. Touch <OK>. All of the content in the user memory is deleted. If you touch <Cancel>, the deletion is cancelled, and youre returned to the previous screen. NOTE Never turn off the power while the display indicates
<Executing...>. Doing so will damage the KRs internal memory, making it unusable. Carrying out this operation does not initialize any settings other than the user memory settings. To restore settings other than those for the user memory to the original factory settings, carry out Factory Reset (p. 148). Chapter 9 Various Settings Automatically Starting the Quick Tour Adjusting the Piano Designer Resonance You can set the instrument so that the Quick Tour starts automatically with no operation required. 1. Hold down the [Transpose] button and press the
[Ambience/Reverb] button. The Quick Tour screen appears. 2. Press the [Option] button. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50 You can made precise changes to the Piano Designer Resonance setting. More of the resonance effect is applied as the value is increased. 1. Press the [Piano Designer] button. 2. Press the [Option] button. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-touchpanel.eps_50 3. Touch of each parameter to make settings. 3. Touch of each item to make settings. Item Display Explanation Item Explanation Auto Start ON, OFF BGM ON, OFF This setting determines whether or not Auto Demo starts when no adjustment or other operation is performed within a fixed period of time. This setting determines whether or not background music is added when Auto Demo begins. When Auto Start is set to On, the demo starts playing automatically when the KR-107's power is switched on. The demo stops playing if the instrument is operated in any way. After operation has ceased, and a period of five to ten minutes passes without the instrument being touched, the demo automatically starts again. When Auto Start is set to Off, the demo does not start unless you touch the icon in the Demo screen. 4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Quick Tour screen. This setting is saved even after the power is turned off.
* For more information about Quick Tour, refer to the Quick Start. String resonance Damper Reso-
nance Key-off Reso-
nance With an acoustic piano, playing a note causes the strings for other keys already being pressed to resonate. The function that reproduces this resonant sound is called String Resonance. When the damper pedal on an acoustic piano is pressed, the sound of the key that is played causes other strings to resonate, adding rich reverberation and breadth to the sound. This function reproduces the resonant sound created by pressing the damper pedal (Damper Resonance). This reproduces the key off sound
(the subtle sound made when the keys are released) produced when playing an acoustic piano. C h a p t e r 9 151 Chapter 9 Various Settings Registor Music Assistant 1. 2. 3. 4. Disabling Functions Other Than Piano Performance
(Panel Lock) The Panel Lock function locks the KR in a state where only piano performance can be used, and all buttons will be disabled. This prevents the settings from being inadvertently modified even if children press the buttons accidentally.
In the Panel Lock state, only the grand piano sound can be played. 1. Turn down the volume all the way. 2. Press the [Power] switch to turn off the power. 3. While holding down the [Wonderland/Game] button, 9 r e t p a h C press the [Power] switch and turn on the power. Then, continue to hold down the button for a few seconds. All buttons except for piano play are disabled. Adjust the volume. When you play the keyboard, the grand piano sound will be heard. To undo the Panel Lock function, turn the volume down to the minimum, and turn on the power once again. 152 Detailed Song Playback Settings Changing the Tone Settings When Playing Back Songs
(Play Mode) With the normal setting, GS tones (sounds that are compatible with other GS instruments) will normally be used to play back song data. By changing this setting, you can play back song using KR-specific tones for certain portions of the data. For detailed information about GS, refer to About the KR Sound Generator (p. 183). 1. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. Touch to switch the screens. 2. Touch <Play Mode>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-plymode.eps_60 3. Touch the icon to choose the setting. Icon Explanation GS KR Playback uses GS-compatible tones for performances that sound like other GS instruments. Playback uses KR tones for greater expressiveness. However, differences may appear when playing back using devices other than the KR. 4. Press the [Exit] button to go back to the Menu screen. 5. After changing this setting, try selecting the song once again. For more detailed information about selecting a song, refer to Playing a Song (p. 64). Viewing Song Information
(Information) You can view file names and other information concerning songs. 1. Press the [Song/File] button. 2. Touch <File>. 3. Touch <Information>. A song information is displayed. Hiding the Lyrics (Lyrics) Some commercially available music files for use in karaoke, as well as some of the internal songs include lyrics data. When you play such music files, the lyrics automatically appear in the screen. If you do not want lyrics to appear automatically, set this to OFF. 1. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. Touch to switch the screens. 2. Touch <Lyrics>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-lyric.eps_60 3. Touch Display to select the setting. Explanation ON OFF Lyrics are displayed automatically (when performance data containing lyrics is played back). Lyrics are not displayed, even if the song data being played back contains lyrics data. 4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen. Even when this is set to OFF, you can still have the lyrics be displayed by touching <lyrics> when it appears in the Piano or Basic screen (p. 20). Chapter 9 Various Settings The screen may be switched when you press the button while the Lyrics screen is displayed. To have the lyrics displayed again, touch <**~lyrics~**> on the Piano or Basic screen, or stop playback of the song, then press the
(Play/Stop)] button. Changing the Parts Assigned to the Track Buttons During SMF Playback (Track Assign) Normally, when playing back Roland Piano Digital-
compatible SMFs (p. 183), the left-hand part is assigned to the
[3/Lower] button, and the right-hand part is assigned to the
[4/Upper] button. However, assignment of the right-hand and left-hand parts may differ with some SMF data. If you cannot get the right-hand and left-hand parts to work well set on Auto, then change the setting to 2/1 Part or 3/4 Part. This setting is effective with SMF format song data. This is not effective with the internal songs. 1. Press the [Menu] button. The Menu screen appears. Touch to switch the screens. 2. Touch <Track Assign>. A screen like the one shown below appears. fig.d-trkasgn.eps_60 3. Touch Display Auto 2/1 Part 3/4 Part to select the setting. Explanation C h a p t e r 9 The part assigned to each track will be determined automatically, depending on the song data. Part 1 will be assigned to the right-hand track, part 2 to the left-hand track, and part 3 to the user track. Part 4 will be assigned to the right-hand track, part 3 to the left-hand track, and part 1 to the user track. 153 Chapter 9 Various Settings 4. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen. After changing this setting, try selecting the song once again. For more detailed information about selecting a song, refer to Playing a Song (p. 64). 9 r e t p a h C 154 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices You can connect the KR to external devices such as audio equipment, MIDI instruments and computer. Connecting an External Display or Television You can connect a computer monitor or other external display or a television to the KR107, enabling you to display the Song Select screen, your favorite images, song lyrics, and notations on a larger screen. Connecting Video Equipment With a V-LINK compatible device connected, you can switch images with the keyboard. Connecting MIDI Devices (p. 158) You can connect a MIDI sequencer and record performance data from the KR, or play performance data from the KR on the sequencer. Also, when you connect a MIDI sound module, you can perform on the KR and hear the sounds played through the MIDI sound module. Connecting Audio Equipment (p. 161) The KR has high-quality built-in stereo speakers, but you can also hook it up a stereo system for an even more impressive sound. You can also connect it to a tape recorder or other recording equipment and record your performances. Connecting a Computer (p. 163) You can use a sequencer program (such as Roland Visual-
MT) to record performance data from the KR and play performance data from the program on the KR. Connecting an Expression Pedal You can connect an expression pedal to the KR. Insert the pedal cable into the Pedal connector on the rear panel of the KR107. 925 NOTE Use only the specified expression pedal (EV-7/5; sold separately). By connecting any other expression pedals, you risk causing malfunction and/or damage to the unit. 0 1 r e t p a h C 154 Connecting an External Display or Television You can connect a computer monitor or other external display or a television to the KR107, enabling you to display the Song Select screen, your favorite images, song lyrics, and notations on a larger screen. You can switch screens with the remote. For details, see Using the Remote Control (p. 32). You cannot simultaneously use both an external display and a television with the KR107. Moreover, neither the external display nor the television will be able to display properly if both are connected at the same time. When using an external display, connect the display to the Ext Display connector, but do not connect a television to the Video Out connector. If using a television, connect the television to the Video Out connector, but do not connect any external display to the Ext Display connector. For more information about external display settings, refer to Selecting What Is To Be Displayed on the External Display or Television (p. 50) Connecting an External Display Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument In general, a great many of the VGA monitors and multiscan monitors that are available on the market are compatible with this instrument. However, before you connect any monitor, make sure it meets the following specifications:
Resolution 640 x 480 pixels Horizontal scan frequency 31.5 kHz Vertical scan frequency 60 Hz Connector Signal NOTE 3-row, 15-pin D-Sub type Analog Confirm that the display to be used is compatible with the frequencies mentioned above. Using a display that is not compatible with the above frequencies may result in incorrect image output when images move, and in certain cases may even damage the display. Making the Connections NOTE To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections. D-sub 15 pin
(Mini) D-sub 15 pin
(Mini) KR Bottom Ext Display Connector Display Cable
(Sold separately) External Display 1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the display to be connected. 2. Use display cable (sold separately) to connect the display to the Ext Display connector on the KR107. NOTE You cannot display information or images with an external display when a television is connected to the Video Out jack. To use an external display, first disconnect the television from the Video Out jack, then connect the external display. 3. Switch on the KR107. 4. This sets the display format (p. 157). 5. Switch on the connected display. For more on handling the external display, refer to your displays owners manual. You can also remove the music rest, then place the display there so that it faces forward. For instructions on removing the music rest, refer to Removing the Music Stand (p. 19). When using the KR107 with a display placed on it, be sure to note the following precautions. Make sure the display sits stably on the KR107 before use. Do not let the base of the display rest on any of the music rests moving parts. Keep the base of the display within Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices one of the areas shown by the dotted lines in the illustration below. Areas for placing the display If you are placing the display on top of the KR, we recommend using a liquid crystal display (LCD). If using a cathode ray tube (CRT) display, take extra care to ensure that the display rests stably on the instrument. Turning the Power Off After use, turn off the power using the following procedure. 1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR107. 2. Turn off the KR107. 3. Turn off the connected display. Connecting a Television Video Cable
(Sold separately) KR107s Jack Panel Video Out jack Television Making the Connections Always be sure to use the following procedure when connecting a television. NOTE You cannot display information or images with a television when an external display is connected to the Ext Display connector. To use an television, first disconnect the external display from the Ext Display connector, then connect the external display. 1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the television to be connected. 2. Use a video cable (sold separately) to connect the KR107s Video Out jack with the televisions video input jack. C h a p t e r 1 0 3. Turn on the power to the KR107. 4. This sets the display format (p. 157). 5. Turn on the power to the television. 155 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television (External Display) This selects the content shown on the external display or the television connected to the KR. 1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. 2. Press the [Option] button. 3. Touch <Ext Display>. A screen like the following appears. fig.d-extdisp.eps_50 Notes When Switching the Display on External Displays and Televisions Lyrics are not displayed with audio CDs. You cannot display any lyrics screen when playing back music data that does not include lyrics data. The internal songs include a number of jazz pieces that are played in an improvised fashion, and you may find notes not conforming to measure lines, odd divisions of the parts played in the left and right hand, and other such features that do not match what is shown in the notation. Lyric Color Selects the color used for lyric in the display. Value: White, Black, Red, Yellow, Green, Blue, Cyan, Magenta Device If you find that the image quality of the television is poor, try switching the television format. Value: VGA, PAL, NTSC 4. Touch the parameter to make the settings. 5. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Function screen. Explanation of Each Items Mode Settings Value Auto Explanation The display of notations, lyrics, notation
+ keyboard, and image data are switched automatically. Song List The Song select screen is normally displayed. The Lyrics screen is normally displayed. However, lyrics are displayed only when playing back music files that contains lyrics data. The Notation screen is normally displayed. The notation and keyboard are displayed. Screens are shown the same way they appear in the KR107's display. The User Image is normally displayed 0 1 r e t p a h C Lyrics Notation Notation and Keyboard Panel User Image Display 156 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Connecting Video Equipment
(V-LINK) fig.V-LINKkey A0 B0 C1 D1 E1 F1 G1 A0 G1#
While V-LINK is switched on, no sound is produced when you press any of the twelve keys at the left end of the keyboard. 5. Touch <OFF> to cancel the V-LINK function. Connecting the KR107 to a V-LINK compatible image device allows you to control the images with the KR107. V-LINK (
) is functionality promoted by Roland that allows linked performance of music and visual material. By using V-LINK-compatible video equipment, visual effects can be easily liked to, and made part of the expressive elements of a performance. 921 NOTE To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections. D-sub 15 pin
(Mini) D-sub 15 pin
(Mini) KR Bottom Ext Display Connector Display Cable
(Sold separately) External Display Connection Examples:
fig.02-
V-LINK compatible image device USB MIDI Interface KR107 MIDI OUT 1. 2. 3. 4. Using the V-LINK function Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. Press the [Option] button. Touch <V-LINK>. Touch <ON>. Switches to Image Control mode. You can control images using the twelve keys at the left end of the keyboard. C h a p t e r 1 0 157 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Connecting MIDI Devices Making the Connections By connecting an external MIDI device and exchanging performance data, you can control one device from the other. For instance, you can output sound from the other instrument or switch Tones on the other instrument. Whats MIDI?
MIDI, short for Musical Instrument Digital Interface, was developed as a universal standard for the exchange of performance data between electronic instruments and computers. The KR is equipped with MIDI connectors and a Computer connector to let it exchange performance data with external devices. These connectors can be used to connect the KR to an external device for even greater versatility. 984
* A separate publication titled MIDI Implementation is also available. It provides complete details concerning the way MIDI has been implemented on this unit. If you should require this publication (such as when you intend to carry out byte-
level programming), please contact the nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor. Connectors fig.09-
MIDI Out Connector Connect this to the MIDI In connector on an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable (sold separately). Performance data when you play the keyboard or depress a pedal is sent from this connector to the external MIDI connector. MIDI In Connector Connect this to the MIDI Out connector on an external MIDI device using a MIDI cable (sold separately). This receives MIDI messages that are sent from external MIDI devices. The KR receiving MIDI messages can output sounds, exchange tones and perform other operations.
* External MIDI devices cant be used for remotely changing the Tones played by the KRs keyboard. 0 1 r e t p a h C
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections. 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device youre about to connect. Switch off the power to the KR and the device youre about to connect. Use a MIDI cable (sold separately) to connect the MIDI connectors to each other. Please refer to the connection examples below. Switch on the power to the KR and the connected device. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device. You should also set the MIDI settings as needed. For details on the MIDI-related settings, refer to p. 159p. 161. Connection Examples:
Setup with a MIDI Sequencer fig.09-10 Roland MT Series Out MIDI In KR107
* When the KR is connected to a MIDI sequencer, set it to Local OFF. Refer to Disconnecting the Keyboard from the Internal Sound Generator (Local On/Off) (p. 160). Connecting with a MIDI Sound Module fig.09-
Sound Module THRU MIDI OUT IN KR107 158 Performing in Ensemble with MIDI Instruments
(MIDI Ensemble) You can connect an electronic percussion device or other MIDI instrument to the KRs MIDI In connector for ensemble playing. Making the MIDI settings for the instrument connected to the MIDI In connector is easy. The sounds from the connected MIDI instrument are played from the KRs speaker. 1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. 2. 3. Press the [Option] button. Touch <MIDI Ensemble>. A screen like the following appears. fig.09-04.eps Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices MIDI Settings You can make MIDI settings like those described below. MIDI Setting Screen fig.09-04.eps Display Explanation Tx Channel Local Control Chooses the MIDI send channel
(p. 160). Switches Local Control on or off
(p. 160). 4. Select the method for using the MIDI In connector. Displayed Meaning Normal Normal setting. Make changes in Tone and other settings from the connected device. Pad Keyboard Select this when you have percussion pads
(such as Rolands SPD-20 Total Percussion Pad) connected to the KRs MIDI In connector. You do not need to make any MIDI settings on the KR. Select pad Tones and make other settings from the connected pads (for further details, refer to the Owners Manual provided with the pads). Select this when you have a keyboard (such as a Roland A-37 or AX-7 MIDI Keyboard Controller) connected to the KRs MIDI In connector. You can select tones for the connected keyboard from the KR. No MIDI settings need be made on the KR. 5. When Keyboard is selected in Step 4 above, use to select the Tone. The connected keyboard plays using the selected Tone. Program Change Screen fig.09-04.eps Display Explanation Bank Select MSB Sends Bank Select MSB messages
(p. 161). Bank Select LSB Sends Bank Select LSB messages
(p. 161). Program Change Sends Program Change messages
(Program Numbers) (p. 161). C h a p t e r 1 0 159 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Making the Settings 1. Switch to the Basic screen, or press the One Touch Program [Piano] button. 2. 3. 4. Press the [Option] button. Touch <MIDI Setting> or <Program Change>. Touch item. to make the setting for each Press the [Exit] button to return to the Functions screen. Selecting the Transmit Channel
(Tx Channel) MIDI organizes things into channels, which are numbered from 1 through 16. Simply connecting a cable is not enough for communication to take place. The connected devices must be set to use the same MIDI channels. Otherwise, no sound will be produced, and no sounds can be selected. Select the transmit channel (116) of the KR. The channel setting is at 1 when the KR is powered up.
: The keyboard and internal sound generator are Local On connected. fig.09-
Sound is emitted Sound Generator Local On
: The keyboard and internal sound generator are Local Off separated. No sound will be produced by the keyboard when it is played. fig.09-
No sound produced Sound Generator Local Off When connecting a unit in the Roland MT series, you dont need to switch off Local Control. MT units transmit Local Off messages when their power is switched on. First turn on the power to the KR-107, then after a few moments, play a note on the KR-107; when you turn on the power to the MT Series device, Local Off is automatically enabled for the KR-107. If the keyboard has been split into right-hand and left-hand sections, messages from the left-hand section are fixed at 3. The KR receives messages on all channels from 1 through 16. Disconnecting the Internal Sound Generator and Keyboard (Local Control) When connecting a MIDI sequencer, set Local Control to OFF. The setting is at Local Control ON when the KR is powered up. As illustrated, information describing what has been played on the keyboard is passed to the sound module over two different routes, (1) and (2). As a result, you hear overlapping or intermittent sounds. To prevent this from happening, route (1) must be disabled, by setting the unit to what is known as Local Off. fig.09-
(1) Local On Sound Generator Sequencer Memory MIDI IN MIDI OUT MIDI OUT MIDI IN Each note played is sounded twice
(2) Soft Tru On 0 1 r e t p a h C 160 Sending Tone Change Messages
(Program Change/Bank Select MSB/Bank Select LSB) A Program Change is a message that means change to the Tone of the specified number. The device that receives this changes to the Tone of the corresponding number. When you choose a Program Change message (Program Number), the Program Number will be transmitted to the MIDI device connected to the KR. The MIDI device that receives the Program Number changes the tone to the corresponding Program Number. Normally, the Tone is selected from the 128 Tones available. Some MIDI devices, however, have more than 128 Tones. With such devices, the Tone is selected through a combination of Program Change messages and Bank Select messages. There are two parts of a Bank Select message: the MSB (Controller 0, with a value of 0127) and the LSB
(Controller 32, with a value of 0127).
* Some MIDI instruments cant handle Bank Select messages. Others can handle Bank Selects, but do not recognize the LSB part. Sending Recorded Performance Data to a MIDI Device (Composer MIDI Out) When Composer Out is active, you can send performance data recorded with the KR to a connected MIDI device or computer. When you turn on the power, this is set to OFF (data is not sent). 1. 2. Touch <Composer MIDI Out>. Press the [Menu] button. fig.09-04.eps 3. 4. Touch to set ON or OFF. Press the [Exit] button to return to the Menu screen. Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Connecting to Audio Equipment When you connect the KR to audio equipment, you can play the sounds from the KR through the speakers on the audio equipment or record your performances on a tape recorder or other recording device. When connecting, please use audio cables (sold separately) with standard phone plugs. Connectors fig.09-
Output (Main) Jacks You can connect audio equipment using audio cables (sold separately) and play the sounds from the KR through the speakers on the connected equipment, or record your performances on a tape recorder or other recording device. If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must use the L (Mono) jack. Input Jacks You can connect another sound source, such as audio equipment or an electronic instrument, using audio cables
(sold separately). Play the sounds from the connected device through the speakers on the KR. If the input of the connected device is monaural, you must use the L (Mono) jack.
* You cannot use the KR to adjust the volume of the connected sound generating device. 926a
* When connection cables with resistors are used, the volume level of equipment connected to the inputs jacks may be low. If this happens, use connection cables that do not contain resistors, such as those from the Roland PCS series. C h a p t e r 1 0 161 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Making the Connections 2. Turn off the power to the KR and other connected equipment. 3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection. 4. Turn on the connected equipment. 5. Turn on the KR. 6. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device. After use, turn off the power using the following procedure. 1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device youre about to connect. 2. Turn off the KR. 3. Turn off the connected equipment.
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections. Playing Sounds from the KR Through the Speakers on Audio Equipment or Recording Your Performances on a Recording Device fig.09-
Input R/L
(Line In, Aux In) KR107 1. 2. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device youre about to connect. Turn off the power to the KR and other connected equipment. 3. Use audio cables (sold separately) to make the connection. 4. Switch on the KR. 5. Switch on the connected device. 6. Adjust the volume level on the KR and the connected device. Recording KR Performances on a Recording Device 7. Start recording with the connected device. 8. Play the keyboard. 9. When the performance ends, stop recording on the connected equipment. Playing Audio Equipment Sounds Through the Speakers on the KR fig.09-
Output R/L
(Line Out) KR107 0 1 r e t p a h C 1. Turn the volume all the way down on the KR and on the device youre about to connect. 162 Connecting a Computer Connect to the MIDI Connectors You can use a USB MIDI interface cable (sold separately) to connect the KR to your computer. If the KR is connected to a computer in which sequencer software such as Rolands Visual MT is installed, a song youve recorded on the KR can be saved on your computer. Connection examples
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.
In order to make connections to your computer, you must install MIDI driver software on your computer. For details, refer to the owners manual for your MIDI interface. Use a USB MIDI interface cable to connect the USB connector of your computer to the MIDI connectors of the KR. fig.comp.e Bottom left of the KR MIDI OUT MIDI IN USB Connector of your Computer Computer USB MIDI Interface Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Connect to the USB Connector You can connect you computer with a USB cable to the USB connector, located on the left underside of the KR-107, and exchange MIDI data between the instrument and the computer. You can use the KR to play SMF data created with the computer and exchange performance data in the same manner as with MIDI devices connected to the MIDI connectors. Connecting your computer to the KR107 for the first time requires installation of the USB Driver (on the included CD-ROM) to the computer. The correct driver and the installation procedure will depend on your system and on the other programs you are using. Be sure to read the Readme file on the CD-ROM before installation. Windows XP/2000
\W2kXP\Readme_E.htm Windows Me/98/98SE
\W98Me\Readme_E.htm Mac OS X
\Driver (Mac OS X)\Readme_e.htm
* Only MIDI data can be transmitted using USB.
* To prevent malfunction and/or damage to speakers or other devices, always turn down the volume, and turn off the power on all devices before making any connections.
* USB cables are not included. Consult your Roland dealer if you need to purchase.
* Turn on the power to the KR107 before starting up MIDI applications on the computer. Do not turn the KR107 on or off while any MIDI application is running.
If not using USB, disconnect the USB cable from the KR107. If during the transmission/reception of data, the computer switches to energy-saving mode or suspended mode, or if the KR107s power is switched on or off, the computer may freeze, or the KR107s operation may become unstable.
* Do not connect or disconnect the USB cable while the KR107s power is on++++++++++++. For more on system requirements, refer to the USB Installation Guide. However, note that the KR107 is not compatible with Mac OS 9. C h a p t e r 1 0 163 Chapter 10 Connecting External Devices Connection examples fig.comp.e Bottom left of the KR USB connector USB Connector of your Computer Computer 1. Turn off the power to the KR107 and the computer. 2. Start up the computer. 3. Connect the KR-107 and the computer with a USB cable. 4. Turn on the power to the KR-107. Refer to the owner's manual that came with your computer Making the Settings for the USB Driver This sets the USB driver used when you have a computer connected to the USB connector. 1. Open the Basic screen or press the One Touch [Piano]
button. 2. Touch the [Setting] button. 3. Touch <USB Driver>. 4. Touch to select the driver type. Indication Description USB Driver Original Original 2 Generic Select this when using the supplied driver with a USB connection. Under ordinary circumstances, use this mode. This is an auxiliary mode. It is not normally used. Select this when using a generic USB driver included with the OS with a USB connection. 5. After changing the settings, turn the power off, then on again. 164 0 1 r e t p a h C Appendices Troubleshooting If you think theres a problem, read this first. Cause/Remedy Case The power doesnt come on Is the power cord connected and plugged in correctly? (p. 16) The button doesnt work Is the panel locked? (p. 152) Turn the power off, then back on. Nothing appears on screen Vertical lines appear in the screen/Color is washed out at the edges of the screen The touch screen doesnt respond correctly Depressing a pedal has no effect, or the pedal effect doesnt stop The KR uses a liquid-crystal screen, so text may not be displayed when the ambient temperature is below freezing. These occur due to the nature of a liquid crystal display, and do not indicate a malfunction. They can be minimized by adjusting the brightness of the screen (p. 19). The positioning of the touch screen may become displaced if some time has passed since it was last used. Take a look at Calibrating the Touch Screen (Touch Screen) (p. 149) to correct the positioning. Is the pedal connected correctly?
Make sure the pedal cord extending from the stand is securely connected to the pedal connector on the rear of the unit (p. 16). Has a different function been assigned to the pedal?
See Assigning Functions to Pedals and Performance Pads (Pedal Setting/User Functions) (p. 142). Normal pedal operation is automatically enabled when the One Touch Program
[Piano] button is pressed (p. 18). The volume level of the instrument connected to Input jacks is too low Could you be using a connection cable that contains a resistor?
Use a connection cable that does not contain a resistor. 926b external memory+++++
Low hum coming from external device Mic volume has changed+++++
Remocon is not affected+++++
Do you have different external devices plugged into different power outlets?
When connecting external devices, always draw power from the same outlet. Vocal Effect++++++++++++
Case Cause/Remedy
Images not shown on external display when external display is connected Is the external display properly connected (p. 154)?
Is the external displays power turned on?
Are you using a display that is compatible with the KR?
Refer to Displays That Can Be Connected to This Instrument (p. 154). Do you have a television and external display connected at the same time?
Connect only one of these. Are the KRs settings correct?
Follow the instructions in Selecting Images To Be Shown on the KR and External Displays (User Image Display)
(p. 146) to set the External Display image. Also refer to Changing the Settings for Showing Images with the External Display and the Television (External Display) (p. 156). yokosen+++++
television+++++
No sound is heard Is the volume level of the KR (p. 18) or connected device turned all the way down?
Are headphones plugged in? (p. 18)
Has the Balance knob been moved all the way to the right or left?
Has the volume been set to 0 using the Part Balance? (p. 62) Are all sliders in the Equalizer screen at the minimum level? (p. 33) Has the footage been adjusted so that all frequency components arent sounded? (p. 15 in the Quick Start) Is the speaker cable connected and plugged in correctly?
V-LINK++++++++++++
Have all devices been switched on?
Are the MIDI cables connected correctly?
(p. 158) Does the MIDI channel match the connected instrument? (p. 160) No sound is heard No sound is heard
(when a MIDI instrument is connected) 165 A p p e n d i c e s Troubleshooting Case Cause/Remedy Case Cause/Remedy No sound is heard when the keyboard is played Has Local Control been set to Off?
When Local Control is set to Off, no sound is produced by playing the keyboard. Set Local Control to On (p. 160). Not all played notes are sounded The maximum number of notes can play simultaneously is 128. Frequent use of the damper pedal during automatic accompaniment or when playing along with a song on floppy disk may result in performance data with too many notes, causing some notes to drop out. The sound is strange Sounds are heard twice (doubled) when the keyboard is played The tuning or pitch of the keyboard or song is off Effects cannot be applied to Tones A note doesnt stop playing Is the KR in layer play? (p. 25) When the KR is connected to an external sequencer, set it to the Local OFF mode
(p. 160). Alternatively, the sequencer could be set so its Soft Thru feature is OFF. Have you set transpose? (p. 87) Are the settings for the Temperament and Stretch Tuning correct? (p. 141) Is the setting for the Master Tune correct?
(p. 145) If different effects have been selected for the right-hand, left-hand, Layer, and other Tones, and the effects for the Parts don't match, only one of the effects is applied. Its not possible to apply more than one effect at the same time, so when a performance has been recorded on multiple tracks or when playing along with a song as its played back, the desired effect may not be applied.+++++Are the settings for the part to which the effect is applied assigned to any part other than the one to which you want to have the effect applied?
Have the Chord Tone and Bass Tone been changed? (p. 138) Some Chord Tone and Bass Tone notes may be sounded continuously. The Tone has changed Reverberation still audible even with Reverb turned off Sound from the Output jacks is not right In the upper range, the sound changes abruptly beyond a certain key A High-pitched whine is produced During automatic accompaniment, changing the Music Style automatically changes the Tones and tempo of the upper part of the keyboard to match the new Music Style. If you want to change only the Music Style without also altering the tempo and Tone, check out Changing Music Styles Without Changing the Tone or Tempo (One Touch Setting) (p. 138). When a performance made along with a Music Files tune has been recorded, recording the performance to button [1/
Whole] may make the Tones for buttons [3/
Lower] and [4/Upper] change as well. Since the KRs piano sounds faithfully reproduce the sense of spaciousness and reverberation of an actual acoustic pianos sound, a certain amount of reverberation is still perceptible, even with the reverb effect deactivated. Have you made the correct Advanced 3D settings for use with headphones?
Changing the Advanced 3D Mode to Headphones or Auto and connecting a pair of headphones configures the settings for use with headphones. On an acoustic piano, notes in the upper one and a half octaves of the keyboard continue to sound until they decay naturally, regardless of the damper pedal. There is a difference in the timbre as well. Roland pianos faithfully simulate such characteristics of the acoustic piano. The range that is unaffected by the damper pedal will change depending on the Key Transpose setting. When listening through headphones:
Some of the more flamboyant and effervescent piano tones feature an ample high-end component, which may make the sound appear to have metallic reverberation added. Since this reverberation becomes particularly audible when supplemented by heavy reverb, you may be able to diminish the problem by reducing the amount of reverb applied to the sound. When listening through speakers:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the KR) would be suspect. Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center. s e c i d n e p p A 166 Case Cause/Remedy Case Cause/Remedy Troubleshooting The bass range sounds odd, or there is a vibrating resonance When listening through speakers:
Playing at loud volumes may cause instruments near the KR to resonate. Resonation can also occur with fluorescent light tubes, glass doors, and other objects. In particular, this problem occurs more easily when the bass component is increased, and when the sound is played at higher volumes. Use the following measures to suppress such resonance. Place speakers so they are 1015 cm from walls and other surfaces. Reduce the volume. Move the speakers away from any resonating objects. When listening through headphones:
Here, a different cause (such as resonance produced by the KR) would be suspect. Consult your Roland dealer or nearest Roland Service Center. The automatic accompaniment doesnt play correctly Cant select a tone or Music Style Press the [Exit] button several times to return to the Basic screen (p. 20), and then select a tone or Music Style. Has the Balance knob been moved all the way to the right? (p. 62) Have you pressed the One Touch Program
[Arranger] button?
If the One Touch Program [Arranger]
button has not been pressed, only the rhythm pattern is played (p. 53). Is the 16-track Sequencer screen displayed?
(p. 113) Has Chord Intelligence been switched off?
(p. 138) Is the setting for Piano Style Arranger active? (p. 61) In certain cases, such as when playing Music Styles on floppy disks, the accompaniment may lag when excessive amounts of performance data are used. Automatic accompaniment is not heard Chord Intelligence cant be used Accompaniment tempo becomes unstable Song doesnt play back correctly Song doesnt play back Does the screen indicate message, like OK to delete song? (p. 89) The internal songs cannot be played back while recorded performance data remains in the KRs memory. Try playing back the song after deleting the performance data. Only the sound of a particular instrument in a song does not play Pressing the [
(Reset)] button doesnt return to the beginning of the song The [
(Fwd)]
and [
(Bwd)]
buttons dont work Is the light for the Track button extinguished? (p. 83) If the button light is out, the music on that track is not heard. Press the track button so the light is illuminated. Have song settings been changed for each Part on the 16-Track sequencer screen (p. 114)?
Some music files may contain settings that stop play at a point partway through the
(Reset)] button several song. Press the [
times more to return to the beginning of the tune. Has a Marker placed in the song? (p. 84) The fast-forward and reverse buttons are ignored while music files is being read in. Wait until processing finishes. If you attempt to play back performance data that contains more data than the entire capacity of the KRs memory, you may find that operations other than playback (such as rewind or fast forward) become unavailable. There is a slight delay before playback of a song on external memory starts There are two types of SMF music files:
format 0 and format 1. If the song uses SMF format 1 data, there will be a slight delay until playback starts. Refer to the booklet that came with the music files youre using to determine the format type. Lyrics are not indicated properly in the display Notation is not indicated properly in the display With some music files, the lyrics cannot be displayed correctly. If you press a button while the lyrics are being shown in the display, the lyrics will disappear. To recall them, touch <lyrics> in the Piano or Basic screen, or press the
(Play/Stop)] button. In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed. If you select a part that does not contain performance data, notes will not be displayed in the notation. Change the part that is displayed (p. 75). The notation screen feature is particularly unsuitable for the display of difficult, complex musical works that demand accurate notation. Refer to Notes Regarding the Notation Display (p. 73). In the notation screen, some lyrics or notes could extend beyond the edges of the screen, and not be displayed. 167 A p p e n d i c e s Troubleshooting Case Cause/Remedy Song becomes unstable internal song cannot +++++
Unable to play back audio files Cant record Cant record Tempo of recorded song or metronome is off The recorded performance has disappeared In certain cases, such as when playing songs on floppy disks, the song may lag when excessive amounts of performance data are used. remocon [MUTE]++++++++++++
The KR107 can play back audio files in the following format. WAV extension 16bit linear Sampling rate of 44.2 kHz Stereo Has one of the track buttons for recording been selected? (p. 95) Has the setting for Punch-in Recording
(p. 118) or Tempo Recording (p. 127) been made?
Select the replace recording method (p. 117). It is not possible to record while the notation is being generated. Once the unit has finished generating the notation (i.e., when the measure number in the screen is no longer highlighted), try the operation once again. Audio file You cannot include audio files in recordings. If you select an internal song in which the tempo changes during the song, and then record, the tempo will change in the same way for the performances that are recorded on the other tracks. The tempo of the metronome will also change in the same way. If you record additional material without erasing the previously recorded song, the song will be recorded at the first-recorded tempo. Please erase the previously recorded song before you re-record (p. 96). Any performance that has been recorded is deleted when the power to the KR is turned off or a song is selected. A performance cannot be restored once its been deleted. Be sure to save it on a floppy disk or User Memory before you turn off the power
(p. 101). s e c i d n e p p A 168 Error Messages Indication Meaning Error 01:
You can only read the music file. It can not be saved. Error 02:
Error 10:
Error 11:
Error 14:
Error 15:
Error 16:
Error 17:
An error occurred during writing. The storage medias protect tab may be in the Protect (writing prohibited) position, or the storage media may not yet be initialized. No storage media is inserted. Insert the storage media and try again. There is not sufficient free memory in the save destination. Either insert other storage media or delete unneeded files and try again. An error occurred during writing. The storage media may be corrupted. Insert other storage media and try again. Alternatively, you can initialize the storage media. The file is unreadable. The data format is not compatible with the RG-7. Data was not called up in time for playback of the song. After waiting several seconds, you may be able to play back the song by pressing the [
] button again. The selected image data cannot be displayed. Prepare image data that can be used with the RG-7 (p. **). Error 30:
The internal memory capacity of the RG-7 is full. Error 40:
Error 41:
Error 43:
Error 51:
The RG-7 cannot deal with the excessive MIDI data sent from the external MIDI device. Reduce the amount of MIDI data sent to the RG-7. A MIDI cable has been disconnected. Connect it properly and securely. A MIDI transmission error has occurred. Check the MIDI cable and connected MIDI device. There may be a problem with the system. Repeat the procedure from the beginning. If it is not solved after you have tried several times, contact the Roland service center. Error 65:
The Ext Memory port was subjected to excessive current. Check the storage media to confirm that no damage has occurred to it. A p p e n d i c e s 169 Tone List
[Piano]
NaturalGrand Vintage EP FM E.Piano Natural Hps. Vibraphone Ariel Piano Natural Gnd2 Honky-tonk
'60sE.Piano1 Phase Clav.2 Morning Lite Jazzy Vib+Gt Piano Str2 Piano Oohs Rock Piano NaturalMello Stage EP Stage Phazer Vibrations Celesta Marimba Xylophone NaturalC.Hps Clav. Music Box Glockenspiel Grand Piano1 Grand Piano2 MellowPiano1 PianoStrings Bright Piano DetunedPiano Honky-tonk 2 MellowPiano2 PianoKidsCho Air Grand Ballad Piano UprightPiano Mono Piano FM+SA EP MIDI Piano1 EG+E.Piano 1 EG+E.Piano 2 Bell Piano E. Grand Mild E.Grand Soft E.Piano Phase EP E.Piano 1 Pop E.Piano Tremolo EP
'60sE.Piano2 E.Piano 2 EP Phase St.FM EP EP Legend Harpsichord Coupled Hps. Harpsichord2 Comp Clav. Reso Clav. Phase Clav. Pulse Clav Celesta 2 Soft Marimba Vibe Tr. Marimba Tr. Kalimba Music Box 2 Music Bell Music Bell 2 Tubular-bell Church Bell s e c i d n e p p A Ballad Bells Bell Monitor Timeline Vibra Bells
[Organ]
ChurchOrgan1 Combo Jz.Org Ballad Organ German Acco. Blues Harp L-Organ Jazz Organ1 Masked Opera Grand Pipe Theater Org. La Seine ParisRomance Mellow Bars Organ 1 Organ 2 Lower Organ1 Trem. Organ
'70s E.Organ
'60s Organ Jazz Organ2 Jazz Organ3 Jazz Organ4 Chorus Organ Perc. Organ Rock Organ1 Rotary Organ Rotary Org.S Rotary Org.F ChurchOrgan2 Pipe Organ Trem.Flute Organ Flute Nason flt 8'
Organ Bass Pipe Org. Bs Digi Church VS Organ Metalic Org. CheeseOrgan Accordion Fr AccordionFr2 Accordion It Bright Acco. Soft Acco. Bandoneon Harmonica
[Guitar / Bass]
EX Nylon Gtr EX Steel Gt. Jazz Guitar2 Fl.Gtr Roll Mandolin JC Chorus Gt TC Clean ff Overdrive Gt DistortionGt Amore Story EX A.Guitar2 Uncle Martin Flamenco Gtr Jazz Guitar Wild Ac.Bs A.Bass+Cymbl Acoustic Bs. Fingered Bs. Picked Bass Fretless Bs. Nylon Guitar Requint Gtr EX Ac.Guitar Steel-str.Gt 12-str.Gt Steel + Body Nylon+Steel EX A.Guitar3 Steel Vox Ukulele Hawaiian Gt Clean Gt. JC Clean Gt. Mid Tone GTR TC Rear Pick Acid Guitar Open Hard Feedback Gt. Power Guitar Guitar Pinch Mystic Gtr Funk Gt. Funk Gt.2 Muted Gt. Muted Dis.Gt Rock Rhythm Dist Rtm GTR Wah Brush Gt Wood Bass W.Bass+Ride Rockabilly Finger Slap Mr.Smooth Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 Synth Bass 1 Jungle Bass Hammer SynthBass101 ResoSH Bass Acid Bass Clavi Bass Synth Bass 2 Beef FM Bass Attack Pulse Rubber Bass Sitar Sitar 2 Banjo Shamisen Koto Taisho Koto
[Strings]
DolceStrings Velo Strings Dolce Qrt Lunar Strngs R&B SoftPad Wind & Str Aerial Harp Violin Cello Harp Strings Mellow Str EX Orchestra Slow Violin PizzicatoStr Strings Oct Strings Strings 2 DecayStrings Bright Str Slow Strings SlowStrings2 Legato Str Warm Strings Sahara Str Decay Str2 Tremolo Str Orchestra Orchestra 2 Farewell Choir Str Bell Strings Pearly Harp Harp St. Harp Viola Contrabass Santur Yang Qin Yang Qin 2 Er Hu Soft Pad Soft Pad 2 Syn.Strings1 Syn.Strings2 Syn.Slow Str OB Strings JP Saw Str Timpani Warm JP Str OrchestraHit Good Old Hit Euro Hit 6th Hit Bass Hit Philly Hit Philly Hit 2 Mix Hit 1 Mix Hit 2
[Sax/Brass]
BlowAltoVib PowerBrass 2 Sax Section Flute Good Old Day Brass Sect 2 EX Tp&Shake Super Tenor AltoSax Soft Soprano Sax Clarinet Oboe EX Trumpet Flugel Horn Pan Flute Qu Di SuperF.Horns Angel Pipes Trumpet Tp Shake Bright Tp. Warm Tp. Dark Trumpet Romantic Tp Trombone Trombone 2 Twin bones Bones Sect. Bright Tb. Tuba MutedTrumpet MuteTrumpet2 MuteTrumpet3 French Horns French Horn2 OrchestraBrs Brass 1 Brass 2 BrassSection PowerBrass Pop Orch Contemp'Orch Brass sfz Brass Fall Trumpet Fall EX Alto Sax AltoSax + Tp Alto Sax Grow Sax BreathyTenor Tenor Sax Tenor Sax 2 Tenor Sax f Tenor Sax B Baritone Sax English Horn Bassoon Piccolo Flute 2 Recorder Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Bagpipe Lochscape Andes Mood HimalayaPipe Wide SynBrss DeepSynBrass Jump Brass Saw Brass1 Saw Brass2 Synth Brass1 Synth Brass2 DetuneSawBrs Pro Brass SynBrass sfz
[Voice]
Aerial Choir Jazz Scat Kid's Choir Dreaming Box Rich Choir Angels Choir Boys Choir Opera Voice Mellow Choir Holy Voices Mystic Str Trancy X HPF Slicer Side Band X Glasswaves Church Choir Voice Oohs Voice Oohs 2 Choir Hahs Decay Choir Doos Voice Doot Accent Dat Accent Bap Accent Thum Voice Humming SynVox 170 Analog Voice InfinitePhsr X Super Saws Fat Stacks Frgile Saws SuperSawSlow Electrostars Bending Logo 2600 Sine Square Wave Mg Square JP8 Square LM Square Syn.Square CC Solo Sleeper Dual Sqr&Saw Jupiter Lead Sinetific FM Lead 1 FM Lead 2 Saw Wave Saw Doctor Solo Mg Lead P5 Saw Lead JP SuperSaw Rhythmic Saw Natural Lead SequencedSaw Waspy Synth Velo SawLead Attack Lead DelyResoSaws Wezcoast Syn.Calliope JP8 Pulse LM PureLead Orgaenia Chiffer Lead Cheese Saw JP OctAttack Charang Reso Saw Wire Lead 2600 SubOsc Solo Vox RAVE Vox 5th Saw Wave Freeze Synth Bass & Lead Fat & Perky Delayed Lead Fantasia Fantasia 2 New Age Pad New Age Pad2 Sugar Key FreezinNight New Year Day Warm Pad Sine Pad Nu Epic Pad Hollow Pad Decay Pad Polysynth P5 Poly Poly King Octave Stack Hoovercraft DOC Stack Bustranza Space Voice Heaven II Warm SquPad Voyager Film Cue HumanKindnes Bowed Glass Metal Pad Orbiting Visionary Halo Pad JP8 Sqr Pad Vox Sweep Consolament JP-8 Phase Sweep Pad Sweep Pad 2 Ice Rain Clavi Pad Toy Box Soundtrack Crystal Syn Mallet ChristmasBel Clear Bells Himalaya Ice Glittery Pad Atmosphere Harpvox Nylon Harp Nylon + EP HollowReleas Tubulence Landing Pad Shangri-La Motion Pad Brightness Org Bells Goblin Saturn Siren RandomEnding Echo Drops Echo Bell Echo Pan Echo Pan 2 Big Panner Ai-yai-a Saturn Rings Star Theme Rising Osc Galaxy Way 12th Planet PolySweep Nz En-co-re Piano 1 Piano 1w Piano 1d Piano 2 Piano 2w Piano 3 Piano 3w Honky-tonk Honky-tonk 2 E.Piano 1 E.Piano 2
'60s E.Piano E.Piano 1v E.Piano 2v Detuned EP 1 Detuned EP 2 Harpsichord Coupled Hps. Harpsi.w Harpsi.o Clav. Celesta Glockenspiel Music Box Vibraphone Vibe.w Marimba Marimba w Xylophone Tubular-bell Church Bell Carillon Santur Organ 1 Organ 2 Pop Organ 1 Detuned Or.1 Detuned Or.2 Church Org.1 Church Org.2 Church Org.3 Full Organ Jazz Organ1 Rock Organ Reed Organ Accordion Fr Accordion It Harmonica Bandoneon Nylon-str.Gt Nylon Gt.2 Nylon Gt.o Ukulele Steel-str.Gt 12-str.Gt Mandolin Jazz Guitar Hawaiian Gt Clean Gt. Chorus Gt. Muted Gt. Funk Gt. Funk Gt.2 Overdrive Gt DistortionGt Feedback Gt. Gt.Harmonics Gt. Feedback Acoustic Bs. Fingered Bs. Picked Bs. Fretless Bs. Slap Bass 1 Slap Bass 2 SynthBass101 Synth Bass 1 Synth Bass 2 Synth Bass 3 Synth Bass 4 Rubber Bass Violin Slow Violin Viola Cello Contrabass Tremolo Str PizzicatoStr Harp Timpani Strings Orchestra Slow Strings Syn.Strings1 Syn.Strings2 Syn.Strings3 Choir Aahs Choir Pop Voice SynVox OrchestraHit Trumpet Trombone Trombone 2 Tuba MutedTrumpet French Horns French Horn2 Brass 1 Brass 2 Synth Brass1 Synth Brass2 Synth Brass3 Synth Brass4 AnalogBrass1 AnalogBrass2 Soprano Sax Alto Sax Tenor Sax Baritone Sax Oboe English Horn Bassoon Clarinet Piccolo Flute Recorder Pan Flute Bottle Blow Shakuhachi Whistle Ocarina Square Wave Square Sine Wave Saw Wave Saw Doctor Solo Syn.Calliope Chiffer Lead Charang Solo Vox 5th Saw Wave Bass & Lead Fantasia Warm Pad Polysynth Space Voice Bowed Glass Metal Pad Halo Pad Sweep Pad Ice Rain Soundtrack Crystal Syn Mallet Atmosphere Brightness Goblin Echo Drops Echo Bell Echo Pan Star Theme Sitar Sitar 2 Banjo Shamisen Koto Taisho Koto Kalimba Bagpipe Tone List Fiddle Shanai Tinkle Bell Agogo Steel Drums Woodblock Castanets Taiko Concert BD Melo. Tom 1 Melo. Tom 2 Synth Drum 808 Tom Elec Perc. Reverse Cym. Gt.FretNoise Gt.Cut Noise String Slap Breath Noise Fl.Key Click Seashore Rain Thunder Wind Stream Bubble Bird Dog Horse-Gallop Bird 2 Telephone 1 Telephone 2 DoorCreaking Door Scratch Windchime Helicopter Car-Engine Car-Stop Car-Pass Car-Crash Siren Train Jetplane Starship Burst Noise Applause Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion A p p e n d i c e s 171 Drum Set List
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number. POP ROCK JAZZBRUSH HIP HOP VOX DRUM 22 25 27 30 32 34 37 39 42 44 46 49 51 54 56 58 61 63 66 68 70 73 75 78 80 82 85 87 90 92 94 97 99 102 104 106 21 23 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 C2 36 38 40 41 43 45 47 C3 48 50 52 53 55 57 59 C4 60 62 64 65 67 69 71 C5 72 74 76 77 79 81 83 C6 84 86 88 89 91 93 95 C7 96 98 100 101 103 105 107 108 C8
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
R&B Snare Rock Snare m 1 Rock Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare m 1 Finger Snap TR-707 Claps Hand Clap Hand Clap 2 Hand Clap Pop Pedal HH Gospel Hand Clap Snare Roll Pop Kick 2 Pop Kick 1 Pop Side Stick Pop Snare s 1 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare s 2 Pop Low Tom f Pop CHH 1 Pop Low Tom Pop CHH 2 Pop Mid Tom f Pop OHH Pop Mid Tom Pop High Tom f Pop Crash Cymbal 1 Pop High Tom Pop Ride Cymbal 1 Pop Chinees Cymbal Pop Ride Bell Tambourine 2 Splash Cymbal Cha Cha CowBell Pop Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Pop Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Shaker 3 Shaker 4 Short Hi Whistle
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro Long Guiro
[EXC3]
Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Hi-Timbale Flam Lo-Timbale Flam Timbale Phrase Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute
Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Bongo CowBell
Bongo CowBell
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
R&B Snare Pop Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare m 2 Finger Snap 2 TR-707 Claps Hand Clap Hand Clap 2 Hand Clap Pop Pedal HH Gospel Hand Clap Snare Roll Rock Kick 2 Rock Kick 1 Rock Side Stick Rock Snare s 1 Pop Snare Ghost Rock Snare s 2 Rock Low Tom f Rock CHH 1 Rock Low Tom Rock CHH 2 Rock Mid Tom f Rock OHH Rock Mid Tom Rock High Tom f Rock Crash Cymbal Rock High Tom Rock Ride Cymbal 1 Pop Chinees Cymbal Pop Ride Bell Tambourine 2 Splash Cymbal Cha Cha CowBell Chinees Cymbal Vibra-slap Pop Ride Cymbal 3 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Shaker 3 Shaker 4 Short Hi Whistle
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro Long Guiro
[EXC3]
Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Hi-Timbale Flam Lo-Timbale Flam Timbale Phrase Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute
Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Bongo CowBell
Bongo CowBell
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
R&B Snare Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare m 1 Finger Snap 2 TR-707 Claps Hand Clap Hand Clap 2 Hand Clap Pop Pedal HH Gospel Hand Clap Snare Roll Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Jazz Snare Swing 1 Jazz Snare 1 Jazz Snare Swing 2 Jazz Snare 2 Jazz Low Tom f Pop CHH 1 Jazz Low Tom Pop CHH 2 Jazz Mid Tom f Pop OHH Jazz Mid Tom Jazz High Tom f Jazz Crash Cymbal 1 Jazz High Tom Jazz Ride Cymbal 1 Jazz Chinees Cymbal Jazz Ride Cymbal 2 Tambourine 2 Splash Cymbal Cha Cha CowBell Jazz Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Jazz Ride Cymbal 3 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Shaker 3 Shaker 4 Short Hi Whistle
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro Long Guiro
[EXC3]
Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Hi-Timbale Flam Lo-Timbale Flam Timbale Phrase Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute
Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Bongo CowBell
Bongo CowBell
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Jungle BD 2 Metronome E.Click Metronome Pi Concert SD Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Jungle BD 2 HipHop BD1 TR-808 Rimshot Power Snare 1A TR-707 Clap Power Snare 2A Low Tom 2 Pop CHH 1 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 3 Mid Tom 2 Pop OHH Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 3 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Reverse Cymbal Ride Bell Shake Tambourine Splash Cymbal TR-808 Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 2 Low Bongo 2 Mute High Conga 2 Open High Conga 2 Low Conga 2 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro HipVibraslap
[EXC3]
TR-808 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block High Hoo Low Hoo Mute Triangle2 Open Triangle 2 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause 2 HipHop SD 2 LoFi SD Rim TR-808 Clap Room Snare 1 Standard 1 Snare 2A Room Snare 2 Standard 1 Snare 1 Standard 1 Snare 2B
Tape Rewind Phono Noise Room Snare 1 Room Snare 2A Elec Snare 4A Elec Snare 4B
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
R&B Snare Rock Snare m 1 Rock Snare m 2 Pop Snare m 1 Pop Snare Ghost Pop Snare m 1 Finger Snap TR-707 Claps Hand Clap Hand Clap 2 Hand Clap Pop Pedal HH Gospel Hand Clap Vox Dut Vox Dom Vox Tuush Vox Hehho Vox Doyear Vox Thu!
Vox That Vox Aahhh Vox Tu Vox Dooh Vox Ptu Vox Down Vox Pa Vox Bom Vox Toear Vox Aahhu Vox Toya Vox Thu Vox Cheey Vox Cymm Vox Tub Vox Pruru Vox Tut Vox Tyun Vox Tdum Vox Afahhhh High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Shaker 3 Shaker 4 Short Hi Whistle
[EXC2]
Long Low Whistle [EXC2]
[EXC3]
Short Guiro Long Guiro
[EXC3]
Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Cana Hi-Timbale Flam Lo-Timbale Flam Timbale Phrase Shekere 1 Shekere 2 Low Bongo Mute High Bongo Mute
Flamenco Hand Clap Flamenco Hand Clap Bongo CowBell
Bongo CowBell
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
A p p e n d i c e s 172
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number. STD CHINA STANDARD 1 STANDARD 2 STANDARD 3 ROOM Drum Set List
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
22 25 27 30 32 34 37 39 42 44 46 49 51 54 56 58 61 63 66 68 70 73 75 78 80 82 85 87 90 92 94 97 99 21 23 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 C2 36 38 40 41 43 45 47 C3 48 50 52 53 55 57 59 C4 60 62 64 65 67 69 71 C5 72 74 76 77 79 81 83 C6 84 86 88 89 91 93 95 C7 96 98 100 101
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Standard 1 Kick 1 Standard 1 Kick 2 Side Stick 1 Standard 1 Snare 1 TR-909 Clap Standard 1 Snare 2 Low Tom 2 Close Hi-hat1 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 1 Mid Tom 2 Open Hi-hat 1 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2
Cana Ban Gu 1 Taiko 1 Nao Bo Taiko 2 Xiao Bo 1 Taiko 3 Open High HuYinLuo 2 [EXC8]
Taiko 4 Taiko 5 Open High HuYinLuo 1 Taiko 6 Shou Luo 1 Mute Low HuYinLuo 2 Shou Luo 2 Xiao Bo 2 Ban Gu 2 Xiao Bo 3 Open High HuYinLuo 3 Mute High HuYinLuo Mute Low HuYinLuo 1
Open Sagat Close Sagat Ban Gu 1 Ban Gu 3
[EXC8]
[EXC8]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Standard 1 Kick 1 Standard 1 Kick 2 Side Stick 1 Standard 1 Snare 1 TR-909 Clap Standard 1 Snare 2 Low Tom 2 Close Hi-hat1 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 1 Mid Tom 2 Open Hi-hat 1 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Standard 2 Kick 2 Standard 2 Kick 1 Side Stick 2 Standard 2 Snare 1 TR-808 Clap Standard 2 Snare 2 Low Tom 2 Closed Hi-hat 2 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 2 Mid Tom 2 Open Hi-hat 2 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Standard 3 Kick 2 Standard 3 Kick 1 Side Stick 2 Standard 3 Snare 1 TR-808 Clap Standard 3 Snare 2 Low Tom 2 Closed Hi-hat 3 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 2 Mid Tom 2 Open Hi-hat 3 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bar Chime Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Room Kick 2 Room Kick 1 Side Stick 2 Room Snare 1 TR-808 Clap Room Snare 2 Room Low Tom 2 Closed Hi-hat 4 Room Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 2 Room Mid Tom 2 Open Hi-hat 4 Room Mid Tom 1 Room High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Room High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
A p p e n d i c e s 173 Drum Set List
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number. POWER ELECTRONIC TR-808/909 DANCE
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Power Kick2 Power Kick1 Side Stick 2 Dance Snare1 TR-808 Clap Power Snare 1 Power Low Tom 2 Closed Hi-hat 4 Power Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 2 Power Mid Tom 2 Open Hi-hat 4 Power Mid Tom 1 Power High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Power High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push 2 Scratch Pull 2 Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Elec Kick 2 Elec Kick 1 Side Stick 2 Elec Snare 1 TR-808 Clap Elec Snare 2 Elec Low Tom 2 Closed Hi-hat 3 Elec Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 2 Elec Mid Tom 2 Open Hi-hat 3 Elec Mid Tom 1 Elec High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Elec High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Reverse Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push 2 Scratch Pull 2 Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell TR-909 Kick TR-808 Kick TR-808 Rimshot TR-808 Snare 1 TR-808 Clap TR-909 Snare 1 TR-808 Low Tom 2 TR-808 CHH TR-808 Low Tom 1 TR-808 CHH TR-808 Mid Tom 2 TR-808 OHH TR-808 Mid Tom 1 TR-808 High Tom 2 TR-808 Cymbal TR-808 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal TR-808 Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 TR-808 High Conga TR-808 Mid Conga TR-808 Low Conga High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa TR-808 Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro TR-808 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push 2 Scratch Pull 2 Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell TR-808 Kick 2 HipHop BD1 Side Stick 2 Power Snare 2 TR-808 Clap Elec Snare 3 Elec Low Tom 2 CR-78 CHH Elec Low Tom 1 TR-808 CHH Elec Mid Tom 2 CR-78 OHH Elec Mid Tom 1 Elec High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 Elec High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Reverse Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal TR-808 Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa TR-808 Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro TR-808 Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block High Hoo Low Hoo Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
22 25 27 30 32 34 37 39 42 44 46 49 51 54 56 58 61 63 66 68 70 73 75 78 80 82 85 87 21 23 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 C2 36 38 40 41 43 45 47 C3 48 50 52 53 55 57 59 C4 60 62 64 65 67 69 71 C5 72 74 76 77 79 81 83 s e c i d n e p p A C6 84 86 88 174
-----: No sound.
[EXC]: will not sound simultaneously with other percussion instruments of the same number. JAZZ BRUSH ORCHESTRA 21 23 24 26 28 29 31 33 35 C2 36 38 40 41 43 45 47 C3 48 50 52 53 55 57 59 C4 60 62 64 65 67 69 71 C5 72 74 76 77 79 81 83 C6 84 86 88 89 91 93 95 C7 96 98 100 101 103 105 22 25 27 30 32 34 37 39 42 44 46 49 51 54 56 58 61 63 66 68 70 73 75 78 80 82 85 87 90 92 94 97 99 102 104
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Side Stick 2 Jazz Snare 1 Hand Clap 3 Standard 2 Snare 2 Low Tom 2 Closed Hi-hat 3 Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 2 Mid Tom 2 Open Hi-hat 3 Mid Tom 1 High Tom 2 Crash Cymbal 1 High Tom 1 Ride Cymbal 1 Chinese Cymbal Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC1]
[EXC7]
[EXC7]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap High Q Slap Scratch Push Scratch Pull Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Jazz Kick 2 Jazz Kick 1 Side Stick 2 Brush Tap Brush Slap Brush Swirl Brush Low Tom 2 Brush Closed Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Low Tom 1 Pedal Hi-hat 2 Brush Mid Tom 2 Brush Open Hi-hat [EXC1]
Brush Mid Tom 1 Brush High Tom 2 Brush Crash Cymbal Brush High Tom 1 Brush Ride Cymbal Chinese Cymbal Brush Ride Bell Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Crash Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Ride Cymbal 2 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC1]
[EXC2]
[EXC2]
[EXC3]
[EXC3]
[EXC4]
[EXC4]
[EXC5]
[EXC5]
[EXC6]
[EXC6]
Bar Chime Snare Roll Finger Snap Closed Hi-hat 3 Pedal Hi-hat 2 Open Hi-hat 3 Ride Cymbal 1 Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Jazz Kick 1 Concert BD Side Stick 2 Concert SD Castanets Concert SD Timpani F Timpani F#
Timpani G Timpani G#
Timpani A Timpani A#
Timpani B Timpani c Timpani c#
Timpani d Timpani d#
Timpani e Timpani f Tambourine Splash Cymbal Cowbell Concert Cymbal 2 Vibra-slap Concert Cymbal 1 High Bongo 1 Low Bongo 1 Mute High Conga 1 Open High Conga 1 Low Conga 1 High Timbale Low Timbale High Agogo Low Agogo Cabasa Maracas Short Hi Whistle Long Low Whistle Short Guiro Long Guiro Claves High Wood Block Low Wood Block Mute Cuica Open Cuica Mute Triangle1 Open Triangle 1 Shaker Jingle Bell Bell Tree Castanets Mute Surdo Open Surdo Applause
Drum Set List SFX Set SFX Set
High Q Slap Scratch Push [EXC7]
Scratch Pull
[EXC7]
Sticks Square Click Metronome Click Metronome Bell Guitar sliding Finger Guitar cutting noise (up) Guitar cutting noise (down) String slap of double bass Fl.Key Click Laughing Screaming Punch Heart Beat Footsteps1 Footsteps2 Applause Door Creaking Door Scratch Wind Chimes Car-Engine Car-Stop Car-Pass Car-Crash Siren Train Jetplane Helicopter Starship Gun Shot Machine Gun Lasergun Explosion Dog Horse-Gallop Birds Rain Thunder Wind Seashore Stream Bubble Cat Bird BabyLaughing Boeeeen Glass & Glam Ice Ring Crack Bottle Pour Bottle Car Horn R.Crossing SL 1 SL 2 Seal Fancy Animal Elephant Bike
Small Club
A p p e n d i c e s 175 Effects List Effect Type Equalizer Spectrum Enhancer Isolator Low Boost Explanation This is a four-band stereo equalizer (low, high). This is a stereo spectrum. Adds sparkle and tightness to the sound. Adds a special effect to the sound by cutting the volume in varying ranges. Boosts the volume of the lower range, creating powerful lows. High Pass Filter @@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@@
Overdrive Distortion Overdrive2 Distortion2 Speaker Simula-
tor Guitar Amp Sim-
ulator Phaser Multi Stage Phaser Infinite Phaser Stereo Flanger 3D Flanger 2Band Flanger Auto Wah Humanizer Ring Modulator Tremolo Auto Pan Slicer Compressor Limiter Stereo Chorus Hexa Chorus Creates a soft distortion similar to that produced by vacuum tube amplifiers. Produces a more intense distortion than Over-
drive. This is an overdrive that provides heavy distor-
tion. This is a distortion effect that provides heavy dis-
tortion. Simulates the speaker type and mic settings used to record the speaker sound. This is an effect that simulates the sound of a gui-
tar amplifier. A phase-shifted sound is added to the original sound and modulated. Extremely high settings of the phase difference produce a deep phaser effect. A phaser that continues raising/lowering the fre-
quency at which the sound is modulated. It produces a metallic resonance that rises and falls like a jet airplane taking off or landing. This applies a 3D effect to the flanger sound. A flanger that lets you apply an effect indepen-
dently to the low-frequency and high-frequency ranges. Cyclically controls a filter to create cyclic change in timbre. Adds a vowel character to the sound, making it similar to a human voice. This is an effect that applies amplitude modula-
tion (AM) to the input signal, producing bell-like sounds. Cyclically modulates the volume to add tremolo effect to the sound. Cyclically modulates the stereo location of the sound. By applying successive cuts to the sound, this ef-
fect turns a conventional sound into a sound that appears to be played as a backing phrase. Flattens out high levels and boosts low levels, smoothing out fluctuations in volume. Compresses signals that exceed a specified vol-
ume level, preventing distortion from occurring. This is a stereo chorus. Uses a six-phase chorus (six layers of chorused sound) to give richness and spatial spread to the sound. Tremolo Chorus This is a chorus effect with added Tremolo (cyclic Space D 3D Chorus 2 Band Chorus modulation of volume). Produces a transparent chorus effect. This applies a 3D effect to the chorus sound. A chorus effect that lets you apply an effect inde-
pendently to the low-frequency and high-fre-
quency ranges. Effect Type Rotary Rotary2 Rotary Multi Stereo Delay1 Stereo Delay2 Stereo Delay3 Stereo Delay4 Stereo Delay5 Explanation The Rotary effect simulates the sound of the rota-
ry speakers often used with the electric organs of the past. This type provides modified response for the ro-
tary speaker, with the low end boosted further. It comprises vibrato/chorus, overdrive, and rota-
ry effects. This is a stereo delay.
This is a stereo delay.
This is a stereo delay.
This is a stereo delay.
This is a stereo delay.
This is a monaural delay. Monaural Delay Modulation Delay Triple Tap Delay Produces three delay sounds; center, left and Adds modulation to the delayed sound. 3D Delay Tape Echo Reverse Delay Lo-Fi Telephone Gate right. This applies a 3D effect to the delay sound. A virtual tape echo that produces a realistic tape delay sound. This is a reverse delay that adds a reversed and delayed sound to the input sound. This is an effect that intentionally degrades the sound quality for creative purposes. This applies a telephone sound. Cuts the reverb's delay according to the volume of the sound sent into the effect. This effect connects an overdrive and a chorus in series. This effect connects an overdrive and a flanger in series. This effect connects an overdrive and a delay in series. This effect connects an distortion and a chorus in series. This effect connects an distortion and a flanger in series. This effect connects an distortion and a delay in series. This effect connects an enhancer and a chorus in series. This effect connects an enhancer and a flanger in series. This effect connects an enhancer and a delay in se-
ries. Overdrive ->
Chorus Overdrive ->
Flanger Overdrive ->
Delay Distortion ->
Chorus Distortion ->
Flanger Distortion ->
Delay Enhancer ->
Chorus Enhancer ->
Flanger Enhancer ->
Delay Chorus -> Delay This effect connects a chorus and a delay in series. Flanger -> Delay This effect connects a flanger and a delay in series. Chorus ->
This effect connects a chorus and a flanger in se-
Flanger ries. On an acoustic piano, holding down the damper pedal allows other strings to resonate in sympa-
thy with the notes you play, creating rich and spa-
cious resonances. This effect simulates these damper resonances. Sympathetic Resonance A p p e n d i c e s 176 Music Style List
[Trad/World]
Musical Pub Boogie Vienna Waltz Kids Shuffle Movie March Music Hall Orch Bolero Orch Waltz Holiday 1 Classic Jing Ju MarchingBand March Slow Waltz Fast Waltz Paris Quiet Waltz Holiday 2 Holiday 3 2 Beat Lager Polka Slow Polka AustrianPolk AustrianWalz Irish Tejano Celtic Musette Scotland Japan Ireland Paso Doble China Pop Jiang Nan Xi Bei SchlagerBeat PartySchlagr
'70sSchlager Disco Fox Party Polka RockSchlager ShufflSchlgr SimpleMarch1 SimpleMarch2 Simple Waltz Kids 4/4 Kids 6/8 Kids Kids Dance
[Ballad/Acoustic]
ModernBallad
'80s Ballad AcoustBallad AcoustEzLstn UnpluggedPop UnplugBallad Adult Pop 1 Adult Pop 2 6/8 Ballad Love Beat UnplugShuffl CoolLiveBand Night Ballad GuitarShuffl Euro Ballad Guitar Trio MidnightBald Pop Ballad Piano Pop Love Songs 12/8 Ballad Scat Ballad
'60s Ballad Torch Song 1 Torch Song 2 Strings 8BeatBallad1 8BeatBallad2 Fireside Piano Ballad Story Ballad SimpleBallad ClassicBalad Symph Ballad R.8-Beat 1 R.8-Beat 2 R.16-Beat 1 R.16-Beat 2 R.16-Beat 3 R.16-Beat 4 R.Afro&Swing R.5BeatSwing R.Shuffle 1 R.Waltz 1 R.March 1 R.5-Beat R.7-Beat P.Pop 1 P.Classic 1 P.Night P.Bossa Nova P.Ragtime P.Classic 2 P.Ballad 2 P.Swing Pop P.Rock'nRoll P.Concerto 1 P.Concerto 2 P.Swing P.Shuffle P.Boogie P.'50s Rock P.Latin
[Oldies/Country]
Detroit Pop
'60s Rock'n DreamSloRock CountryRock1 CountryBald1 Groovin R&B Oldies 1 Clock Rock'n CountryPop 1 SwinginCntry Soul Rock'n Slow Oldies 2 CountryBald2 CountrySwing Rock'n Fever Country Beat Slow Country CountryRock2 Country Fox Blues R&B Slow Dance Twist
'60s Beach Slow Oldies Early Rock Go Go Rock Mersey Beat CountryPop 2 Cajun Country Cntry Dreams Charleston Bluegrass Deep Country
[Gospel/Latin]
Latin Pop 1 Orch Bossa Rhumba GospelShuffl ContPraise 1 ContPraise 2 Gospel Samba ModernChaCha Salsa Soft Gospel Gospel Shout AcoustRhumba Acoust Samba Trad Rhumba Gospel Pop GospelBallad Latin Dance Cha Cha Trad Tango SunshineBosa Jazz Bossa Merengue GuitarRhumba Mambo Fast Samba Fast Bossa Big Samba Luv Bossa Mid Bossa Latin Pop 2 Reggae Tango Beguine Oye Son Revival Gospel Piano Asian Rhumba
[Big Band/
Swing]
MidnitSloSwg BigBand Slow Big Band BigBand Med BigBand Fast Medium Swing Jive Slow Swing Quick Step StringsSwing Foxtrot Swing Fox Fox Band Gipsy Swing Fast Swing JzGuitrSwing Jazz Waltz Blue Boogie BigBandBalad
'30s BigBand Big Band 2 Jazz Ballad LooseBigBand Smooth Jazz A Cappella Scat Swing Organ Swing Dixieland Hawaiian Hula
[Pop/Rock]
Pop
'80s Pop 1 Funky Disco AdultContemp Uptown Rock EZ Listening Strumin'Away
'70s Disco 1 SmoothContmp Simple Rock
'60s Feelin'
16Beat Pop Light Pop Bright Pop Heart Beat Easy Pop
'80s Pop 2
'80s Pop 3 Cute Pop LovelyShuffl
'70s Disco 2
'70s Dance Fever Dance Euro Dance Hard Tekno Big House
'90s House House Pop Ibiza Dance Cool Rap Now Hip Hop Twostep HipHop Beat Hip'n Hop Easy Hop MorningShffl Groovy Pop Smile Pop Warm Pop Sunny Pop Feel Good US Groove Steady Rock Shuffle Rock Dyno Rock Power Rock Heavy Rock Thump Rock Asian Pop s e c i d n e p p A 177 Chord List
* symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
* symbol: Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the (p. 48). C C#
D E E F Cmaj7 C#maj7 Dmaj7 E maj7 Emaj7 Fmaj7 C7 Cm C#7 C#m D7 Dm E 7 E m E7 Em F7 Fm Cm7 C#m7 Dm7 E m7 Em7 Fm7 Cdim C#dim Ddim E dim Edim Fdim Cm7 ( 5 ) C#m7 ( 5 ) Dm7 ( 5 ) E m7 ( 5 ) Em7 ( 5 ) Fm7 ( 5 ) Caug C#aug Daug E aug Eaug Faug Csus4 C#sus4 Dsus4 E sus4 Esus4 Fsus4 C7sus4 C#7sus4 D7sus4 E 7sus4 E7sus4 F7sus4 C6 C#6 D6 E 6 E6 F6 Cm6 C#m6 Dm6 E m6 Em6 Fm6 A p p e n d i c e s 178
* symbol: Indicates the constituent note of chords.
* symbol: Chord shown with an can be played by pressing just the key marked with the (p. 48). F#
G A A B B Chord List F#maj7 Gmaj7 A maj7 Amaj7 B maj7 Bmaj7 F#7 F#m G7 Gm A 7 A m A7 Am B 7 B m B7 Bm F#m7 Gm7 A m7 Am7 B m7 Bm7 F#dim Gdim A dim Adim B dim Bdim F#m7 ( 5 ) Gm7 ( 5 ) A m7 ( 5 ) Am7 ( 5 ) B m7 ( 5 ) Bm7 ( 5 ) F#aug Gaug A aug Aaug B aug Baug F#sus4 Gsus4 A sus4 Asus4 B sus4 Bsus4 F#7sus4 G7sus4 A 7sus4 A7sus4 B 7sus4 B7sus4 F#6 G6 A 6 A6 B 6 B6 F#m6 Gm6 A m6 Am6 B m6 Bm6 A p p e n d i c e s 179 Internal Song List Folks 1 Greensleeves 2 Entertainer 3 Annie Laurie 4 Londonderry Air 5 Ave Maria 6 Amazing Grace 7 8 9 Little Brown Jug When The Saints Go Marchin'
In Stagecoach 10 Hallelujah!
Jazzy Fly Free Secret Agent Late Night Chopin Blue Sky Rag Preludelight Sun Daze 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 Keepers Tale 8 Count On The Blues 9 One Down And Easy 10 A Prelude To ... 11 Bachs A Boppin 12 Kismets Salsa 13 From Matthews Passion 14 Roll Over Ludwig Kids 1 Grandfathers Clock 2 Old MacDonald Had A Farm 3 Twinkle Twinkle, Little Star 4 Mary Had A Little Lamb 5 6 7 London Bridge Jingle Bells Silent Night, Holy Night Kids 8 9 Joy To The World Puppys March 10 Frog Song 11 Little Fox 12 Lightly Row 13 The Cuckoo EZ Classical La Fille Aux Cheveux De Lin La Campanell Eine Kleine Nachtmusik Les patineurs, Valse 1 2 3 4 5 Divertimento 6 Impromptu, Op.90-2 7 Gnossienne 1 8 Die Lorelei 9 Brindisi 10 Air sul G 11 FantaisieImpromptu 12 Grande Valse Brillante 13 Gymnopedie 1 14 Liebestraume 3 15 Mondschein 16 Nocturne No.2 17 Valse, op.64-1 18 Prelude, op.28-15 19 Traumerei 20 Turkischer Marsch(Mozart) 21 Ungarische Tanze 5 22 Osole Mio 23 La Primavera 24 Trepak 25 Canon (Pachelbel) 26 Ombra maifu 27 28 Sonata (Haydn) Italian Concerto Classical Song files of this genre corresponds to the included collection of printed music entitled Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces. 1 2 3 4 Sonate No.15 Liebestraume 3 Etude, op.10-3 Je te veux 5 Valse, op.64-1 6 GolliwogsCakewalk 7 FantaisieImpromptu 8 Arabesque 1 9 Blauen Donau 10 Auf Flugeln des Gesanges 11 Mazurka No.5 12 Gymnopedie 1 13 Etude, op.25-1 14 Clair de Lune 15 Etude, op.10-5 16 Dr.GradusAdParnassum 17 Grande Valse Brillante 18 La priere dune Vierge 19 Course en Troika 20 To The Spring 21 Valse, op.64-2 22 Radetzky Marsch 23 Traumerei 24 Moments Musicaux 3 25 Prelude, op.28-15 26 Harmonious Blacksmith 27 Ungarische Tanze 5 28 Turkischer Marsch(Beethoven) 29 Nocturne No.2 30 Fruhlingslied 31 Praludium 32 Jagerlied A p p e n d i c e s 180 Internal Song List Practice Practice Classical 33 Menuet Antique 34 Fur Elise 35 Turkischer Marsch(Mozart) 36 Standchen 37 Humoreske 38 Blumenlied 7 Gracefulness 8 9 The Hunt Tender Flower 10 The Young Shepherdess 11 Farewell 12 Consolation 39 Alpenglockchen 13 Austrian Dance 40 Menuett G dur(Beethoven) 41 Venezianisches Gondellied 14 Ballad 15 Sighing 42 Alpenabendrote 43 Farewell to the Piano 44 Brautchor 45 Battle of Waterloo 46 Wiener Marsch 47 Le Coucou 48 Menuett G dur(Bach) 49 Spinnerlied 50 Gavotte 51 Heidenroslein 52 Zigeuner Tanz 53 La Cinquantaine 54 Csikos Post 55 Dollys Dreaming Awakening 56 La Violette 57 58 59 60 Frohlicher Landmann Sonatine op.36-1(Clementi) Sonatine op.20-1(Kuhlau) Sonatine No.5(Beethoven) Practice 1 Arabesque 2 Pastoral 3 A Small Gathering 4 5 6 Innocence Progress The Clear Stream 16 The Chatterbox 17 Restlessness 18 Ave Maria 19 Tarantella 20 Angelic Harmony 21 Gondola Song 22 The Return 23 The Swallow 24 The Knight Errant 25 Openness 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Invention 1 Invention 2 Invention 3 Invention 4 Invention 5 Invention 6 Invention 7 Invention 8 Invention 9 Invention 10 Invention 11 Invention 12 Invention 13 Invention 14 Invention 15 41 Beyer 15 42 Beyer 21 43 Beyer 25 44 Beyer 29 45 Beyer 34 46 Beyer 38 47 Beyer 42 48 Beyer 46 49 Beyer 51 50 Beyer 55 51 Beyer 60 52 Beyer 64 53 Beyer 67 54 Beyer 73 55 Beyer 78 56 Beyer 81 57 Beyer 90 58 Beyer 93 59 Beyer 98 60 Beyer 103 61 Czerny 100- 1 62 Czerny 100-10 63 Czerny 100-20 64 Czerny 100-30 65 Czerny 100-38 66 Czerny 100-43 67 Czerny 100-60 68 Czerny 100-75 69 Czerny 100-86 70 Czerny 100-96 981a
All rights reserved. Unauthorized use of this material for purposes other than private, personal enjoyment is a violation of applicable laws. A p p e n d i c e s 181 Parameters Stored to Internal Memory Parameters Stored in the User Program Parameters Stored in Memory Backup Saving Performance Settings (User Program) (p. 108) Remembering the Settings Even When the Power is Turned Off (Memory Backup) (p. 148) Parameters that switch immediately after the User Pro-
gram name is touched when <Option> on the User Pro-
gram screen is set to Delayed Tone Parameters Octave Shift Effects: On/Off, Type, Control 1, Control 2 One-Touch Piano Settings:
Lid, Tuning (Tuning, Key, Stretch Tunings), Resonance (Depth), Key Touch, Hamper Response (Depth) Master Tune Effect: ++++++ Part Metronome: Sound Count-In: Measures, Sound Countdown: Sound Language Track Assign Reverb: On/Off, Type, Depth Advanced 3D:
On/Off, On/Off for Each Part, Various Settings Remote Controls Setting External Display (Device) iR Function System Parameters Parameters That are Stored After the Power is Turned Off Touch Screen Opening Message Auto Demo USB Driver Equalizer Jazz Organ Footage Piano Designer Start: On/Off BGM: On/Off User Settings User Settings User Settings Organ Selected Right-hand Tone, Layer Tone, Left-hand Tone Rotary effect (Slow/Fast), Footage (Upper, Lower), Percussion Tone, Octave Shift, Effect (Type, Control 1, Control 2, On/Off,
+++++++ Part) Bass Tone, Chord Tone Part Balance Keyboard Parts Melody Intelligent Keyboard Mode Pedal Settings On/Off, Type Split 1, Split 2, On/Off for the Part, Layer 1, Layer 2, On/Off for the Part, Keyboard Transpose, Split Point Functions Assigning to the Left Pedal and Center Pedal Bend Range Functions Assigning to the Expression Pedal Performance Pad Settings User Function Reverb On/Off, Type, Depth Vocal Effects On/Off, Echo (Type, Depth), Transformer Type, Harmonist Type, Transformer/Harmonist, Music Files Part MIDI Settings for User Program Bank Select LSB, Bank Select MSB, Program Change, MIDI Transmit Channel Equalizer On/Off, Each Sliders Level, Master Level Dynamic Emphasis On/Off, Type Parameters that switch after the User Program name is touched for a few moments when <Option> on the User Program screen is set to Delayed Music Style Tempo Part Balance Accompaniment Part Accompaniment On/Off, Chord Recognize Mode, Leading Bass On/Off, Original/Variation, Sync Start On/Off,
<Accomp> Setting for Arranger Configuration, Style Orchestrator, Division Arranger Settings s e c i d n e p p A 182 Music Files That the KR Can Use What Are Music Files?
Music Files contain information describing the details of a musical performance, such as the C3 key on a keyboard was pressed for this amount of time, using this amount of force. By inserting the floppy disk into the disk drive on the KR, the performance information is sent from the floppy disk to the piano, and played faithfully by the piano. This is different than a CD, since the music file does not contain a recording of the sound itself. This makes it possible to erase certain parts, or to change instruments, tempos and keys freely, allowing you to use it in many different ways. Regarding Copyright Use of the song data supplied with the Data Disk attached to this product for any purpose other than private, personal enjoyment without the permission of the copyright holder is prohibited by law. Additionally, this data must not be copied, nor used in a secondary copyrighted work without the permission of the copyright holder. The KR allows you to use the following music files Floppy disks saved on a Roland MT Series, or Roland Piano Digital HP-G/R and KR Series instrument Roland Digital Piano Compatible Music Files Rolands original music file is made specifically for practicing the piano. Some follow an instructional curriculum, allowing for a complete range of lessons, such as practicing each hand separately or listening to only the accompaniment. SMF Music Files (720KB/1.44MB format) SMFs (Standard MIDI Files) use a standard format for music file that was formulated so that files containing music file could be widely compatible, regardless of the manufacturer of the listening device. An enormous variety of music is available, whether it be for listening, for practicing musical instruments, for Karaoke, etc.
If you wish to purchase SMF Music Files, please consult the retailer where you purchased your KR. SMF with Lyrics SMF with Lyrics refers to SMF (Standard MIDI File) that contains the lyrics. When Music Files carrying the SMF with Lyrics logo are played back on a compatible device (one bearing the same logo), the lyrics will appear in its display. About the KR Sound Generator The KR come equipped with GM 2/GS sound generators. General MIDI The General MIDI is a set of recommendations which seeks to provide a way to go beyond the limitations of proprietary designs, and standardize the MIDI capabilities of sound generating devices. Sound generating devices and music files that meets the General MIDI standard bears the General MIDI logo. Music files bearing the General MIDI logo can be played back using any General MIDI sound generating unit to produce essentially the same musical performance. General MIDI 2 The upwardly compatible General MIDI 2 recommendations pick up where the original General MIDI left off, offering enhanced expressive capabilities, and even greater compatibility. Issues that were not covered by the original General MIDI recommendations, such as how sounds are to be edited, and how effects should be handled, have now been precisely defined. Moreover, the available sounds have been expanded. General MIDI 2 compliant sound generators are capable of reliably playing back music files that carry either the General MIDI or General MIDI 2 logo. In some cases, the conventional form of General MIDI, which does not include the new enhancements, is referred to as General MIDI 1 as a way of distinguishing it from General MIDI 2. GS Format The GS Format is Rolands set of specifications for standardizing the performance of sound generating devices. In addition to including support for everything defined by the General MIDI, the highly compatible GS Format additionally offers an expanded number of sounds, provides for the editing of sounds, and spells out many details for a wide range of extra features, including effects such as reverb and chorus. Designed with the future in mind, the GS Format can readily include new sounds and support new hardware features when they arrive. Since it is upwardly compatible with the General MIDI, Rolands GS Format is capable of reliably playing back GM Scores equally as well as it performs GS music files (music files that have been created with the GS Format in mind). This product supports both the General MIDI 2 and the GS Format, and can be used to play back music data carrying either of these logos. XG lite XG is a tone generator format of YAMAHA Corporation, that defines the ways in which voices are expanded or edited and the structure and type of effects, in addition to the General MIDI 1 specification. XGlite is a simplified version of XG tone generation format. You can play back any XG music files using an XGlite tone generator. However, keep in mind that some music files may play back differently compared to the original files, due to the reduced set of control parameters and effects. 183 A p p e n d i c e s DIGITAL PIANO Model KR-107 MIDI Implementation Chart Date : Mar. 1, 2005 Version : 1.00 Transmitted Recognized Remarks Basic Channel Mode Note Number :
Velocity After Touch Pitch Bend Control Change Function... Default Changed Default Messages Altered True Voice Note ON Note OFF Keys Chs 0, 32 1 5 6, 38 7 10 11 64 65 66 67 84 91 93 98, 99 100, 101 1 116 Mode 3 x
15113
O O x x O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O Prog Change
: True #
0127
System Exclusive System Common
: Song Pos
: Song Sel
: Tune System Real Time
: Clock
: Commands
: All sound off
: Reset all controllers
: Local Control
: All Notes OFF
: Active Sense
: Reset Aux Message Notes O x x x O x x x x x O x 116 116 Mode 3 Mode 3, 4 (M=1)
* 2
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1 Bank select Modulation Portamento time Data entry Volume Panpot Expression Hold 1 Portamento Sostenuto Soft Portamento control Effect1 depth Effect3 depth NRPN LSB, MSB RPN LSB, MSB Program number 1128 0127 0127 O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O O (Reverb) O (Chorus) O O O 0127 O x x x
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1
*1 x x O (120, 126, 127) O O O (123125) O x
* 1 O x is selectable by SysEx.
* 2 Recognized as M=1 even if M=1. Mode 1 : OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3 : OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2 : OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4 : OMNI OFF, MONO O : Yes X : No 184 Main Specifications
<Keyboard>
Keyboard Touch Sensitivity Keyboard Mode 88 keys (Progressive hammer action keyboard with escapement) 100 levels Whole Split (adjustable split point) Layer Arranger Piano Style Arranger Manual Drums / SFX 128 voices
<Sound Generator>
Conforms to GM2 / GS / XG Lite Max. Polyphony Tones
(Tone Search by terms and by letters) Temperament Stretched Tuning Master Tuning Transpose Effects 6 groups 736 variations (including 8 tone wheel Organs, 18 drum sets, SFX set) 8 types, selectable tonic 2 types 415.3 Hz466.2 Hz (adjustable in increments of 0.1 Hz) Key Transpose (-6+5 in units of semitone) Playback Transpose (-24+24 in units of semitone) Reverb (12 types, 127 levels) Chours, Rotary and 60 other types Advanced 3D Grand Space Dynamic Emphasis (3 types) Equalizer (5 bands, Master level)
<Arranger>
Music Styles
(Style Search by terms and by letters) Music Assistant
(Search by terms and by letters) Programmable Music Styles Melody Intelligence 6 groups 265 styles x 3 types (Style Orchestrator) Over 500 sets x 6 presets Visual Music Assistant Style Converter Style Composer 24 types
<User Programs>
Internal External Memory 36 Max. 99 sets
<Metronome>
Tempo Beat Volume Metronome Pattern Metronome Sound
<Composer>
Tracks Song Note Storage Resolution Recording Method Quarter note = 10500 2/2, 0/4, 2/4, 3/4, 4/4, 5/4, 6/4, 7/4, 3/8, 6/8, 9/8, 12/8 10 levels 11 patterns 8 types 5 tracks / 16 tracks 1 song Approx. 30,000 notes 120 ticks per quarter note Realtime (Replace, Mix, Auto Punch In, Manual Punch In, Loop, Tempo) Step (Chord Sequencer) Beat Map 185 s e c i d n e p p A Edit Other Functions Copy Quantize Delete Insert Erase Transpose Part Exchange Note Edit PC Edit Touch the Notes Replay Super Tones Piano Designer Visual Lesson Wonderland/Game Demo Audition Panel Lock User Image Display BMP Export V-LINK
<External Storage> USB Memory Playable Software Save
<Internal Memory>
Internal Songs
(Song Search by terms and by letters) User Memory
<Others>
Rated Power Output Speakers Display Notation Language Pedals Vocal Effects Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0/1), Roland Original Format (i-Format) Music Style: MSA, MSD, MSE Audio File: WAV Format (44.1 kHz 16 bits linear, stereo) Song: Standard MIDI Files (Format 0), Roland Original Format (i-Format) Music Style: MSE Over 190 songs Max. 200 songs on Favorites Max. 99 User Styles Max. 99 User Program Sets 60 W x 2 20 cm x 2, 5 cm x 2, 10 cm x 2 Bouncing Beat Indicator Graphical Color LCD 320 x 240 dot (backlit LCD) Grand staff / G Clef staff / F Clef staff, with note name /lyrics/ chords / ngering English / Japanese / German / French /
Spanish Yes (built-in, external display, MIDI output) One Touch Arranger Damper Pedal (half-pedal recognition) Soft Pedal (half-pedal recognition, functions assignable) Sostenuto Pedal (functions assignable) Echo Voice Transformer Vocal Keyboard Harmonist Lyrics One Touch Program One Touch Piano Main Specifications USB memory connector FDD connector Output jacks (L/Mono, R) Input jacks (L/Mono, R) Mic Input jack Headphones jack (Stereo) x 2 MIDI In connector x 2 MIDI Out connector USB connector Ext Display connector (15-pin D-Sub type) Video Out jack Expression Pedal jack AC 115 V, AC 117 V, AC 220 V, AC 230 V, AC 240 V (50/60 Hz) Connectors Power Supply Power Consumption 155 W Dimensions
(including the piano stand) 1421 (W) x 550 (D) x 901 (H) mm 56 (W) x 21-11/16 (D) x 35-1/2 (H) inches Including the music rest 1421 (W) x 550 (D) x 1116 (H) mm 56 (W) x 21-11/16 (D) x 43-15/16 (H) inches Weights (including the piano stand) 103 kg / 228 lbs Quick Start Owners Manual Roland 60 Classical Piano Masterpieces Remote Control Dry-cell Batteries USB Installation Guide CD-ROM (Roland Digital Piano USB Driver) Power cord Headphones Hook Anti-theft lock screws USB Memory Flopy Disk Drive Accessories Options
In the interest of product improvement, the specifications and/or appearance of this unit are subject to change without prior notice. 962a s e c i d n e p p A 186 Index Numerics 16-Track Sequencer ..........................................................113 A AC inlet .............................................................................16 Accompaniment Start and Stop ...............................................................54 Sync Start .....................................................................54 Adjuster .............................................................................18 Advanced 3D .....................................................................30
[Ambience/Reverb] button ...............................................30 Arranger Config ..............................................................138 Audio Equipment ............................................................161 Auto Punch-In/Out .........................................................119 Automatic Accompaniment ...............................................46 B Balance ..............................................................................62 Balance Knob .....................................................................62 Bank Select LSB ...............................................................160 Bank Select MSB ..............................................................160 Basic Screen .......................................................................20 Basic tempo .....................................................................127 Bass Tone ...................................................................55, 138 Beat Metronome ..................................................................44 Beat Map ..........................................................................127 Bend Range ......................................................................144 Blank Recording ..............................................................118
[Brilliance] knob ................................................................18
[Song] button .....................................................................64
[Bwd] button .....................................................................65 C Calibration .......................................................................148 Chord Finder .....................................................................49 Chord Intelligence .............................................................48 Chord List ........................................................................178 Chord Sequencer .............................................................120 Chord Tone ................................................................55, 138 Chord type .........................................................................48 Chords .........................................................................48, 77 Clef L .................................................................................77 Clef R .................................................................................77 Compatibility ...................................................................103 Composer MIDI Out ........................................................161 Computer ........................................................................163 Connected Expression Pedal ........................................................154 Connecting Audio Equipment ......................................................161 Computer ...................................................................163 MIDI device ...............................................................158 Contrast .............................................................................19 Contrast knob ....................................................................19 Copy (Song Edit) .............................................................122 Copying Songs ..........................................................................105 User Program .............................................................110 User Styles .................................................................136 Count In .............................................................................82 Countdown ........................................................................56 D Damper pedal ....................................................................18 Delete (Song Edit) ............................................................123 Deleting A song ........................................................................104 User Style ...................................................................135 Divisions ............................................................................46 Drum Set List ...................................................................172 Drums ................................................................................23 Dynamic Emphasis ............................................................32 E Echo ...................................................................................37 Editing .............................................................................121 Effects ................................................................................35 Effects List .......................................................................176 Ending .........................................................................46, 55 Equalizer ............................................................................33 Erase (Song Edit) .............................................................124 Erasing Performance on specific tracks .....................................96 Recorded performance .................................................96 Error Messages ................................................................169 Export ................................................................................78 Expression Pedal ..............................................................154 Ext Display connector ......................................................155 External Display ......................................................154, 156 External Memory ...............................................................98 F Factory Reset ...................................................................147 Factory Setting Touch Screen ..............................................................149 User Memory .............................................................149 Favorites ....................................................................68, 101 QS ** refers to the page number in Quick Start. 187 Index Registering ...................................................................68 Removing .....................................................................69 Fill In .................................................................................57 Fill In To Original ..............................................................46 Fill In To Variation ............................................................46 Finger Numbers .................................................................77 Format Floppy disk ..................................................................99 Functions .........................................................................137
[Fwd] button ......................................................................65 G General MIDI ...................................................................183 General MIDI 2 ................................................................183 GS ....................................................................................183 GS Format ........................................................................183 H Harmonist ..........................................................................38 Harmony ...........................................................................59 Headphones ......................................................................18 I Icon ....................................................................................20 i-format ............................................................................103 Insert (Song Edit) .............................................................124 Internal Song List ............................................................180 Intro .............................................................................46, 54
[Intro/Ending] button .......................................................54 K Karaoke .............................................................................42 Key ....................................................................................77 Key Touch .......................................................................137 L Language .........................................................................145 Layer ..................................................................................25 Layer tone ..........................................................................25 Leading bass ....................................................................143 Lid .....................................................................................17 Local Control ...................................................................160 Loop Recording ...............................................................118 Lower Tone ........................................................................60 Lyrics .........................................................................77, 152 lyrics ..................................................................................20 M Manual Punch-In/Out .....................................................119 Marker .......................................................................84, 140 Erasing .........................................................................85 Moving .........................................................................85 Placing .........................................................................84 Repeat ..........................................................................86 Master Tuning .................................................................145 Melody Intelligence ...........................................................59
[Melody Intelligence] button .............................................59 Memory Backup ..............................................................146 Metronome ........................................................................43 Beat ..............................................................................44 Pattern ..........................................................................45 Sound ...........................................................................44 Volume .........................................................................44
[Metronome] button ..........................................................43 Mic In jack .........................................................................19
[Mic Volume] knob ............................................................19 Microphone .......................................................................19 MIDI ................................................................................158 MIDI Connector ...............................................................158 MIDI Devices ...................................................................158 MIDI Ensemble ................................................................159 MIDI Settings ...................................................................159 Minus One .........................................................................83 Mix Recording .................................................................117 Multitrack Recording .......................................................113 Music Files .........................................................................41 Music Holder .....................................................................16 Music Style ........................................................................46 On Disk ........................................................................51 Rhythm Pattern ............................................................53 Music Style Buttons ...........................................................50 Music Style List ................................................................177 Mute ..........................................................................83, 114 N New Song ..........................................................................90 Notaion Saving as image data ....................................................78 Notation .............................................................................73 Settings .........................................................................75 Note Edit (Song Edit) .......................................................126 O Octave Shift .......................................................................27 One Touch Program [Arranger] button .............................47 One Touch Program [Piano] button ...................................21 One Touch Settings ..........................................................138 One-Touch Arranger .........................................................47 188 QS ** refers to the page number in Quick Start. Settings ......................................................................137 One-Touch Piano ...............................................................21 Opening Message ............................................................146 Original .............................................................................46
[Original] button ................................................................57 Output Jacks ....................................................................161 P Panel Lock .......................................................................151 Part Balance .......................................................................62
[Part Balance] button .........................................................62 Part Exchange (Song Edit) ...............................................125 PC Edit (Song Edit) ..........................................................126 Pedal ..................................................................................18 Pedal Cable ........................................................................16 Pedal connector .........................................................16, 154 Pedal Settings ..................................................................142 Percussion .........................................................................23 Performance Pad .......................................................58, 142 Phones jack ........................................................................18 Piano ..................................................................................21 Piano Screen ......................................................................20 Pickup ................................................................................97 Pitches ...............................................................................77 Play Mode ........................................................................151
[Play/Stop] button ............................................................65 Playing ...............................................................................64 All of the internal songs ...............................................64 At a fixed tempo (Tempo Mute) ..................................81 In random ....................................................................64 Repeat ..........................................................................86 Power Cord .......................................................................16 Power On and Off .............................................................17
[Power] switch ...................................................................17 Preset .................................................................................50 Program Change ..............................................................160 PU (Pickup) .......................................................................97 Punch-in Recording .........................................................119 Q Quantize (Song Edit) .......................................................123 Quick Tour Automatically starting ...............................................150 R Rec Mode ...................................................................96, 116 Record/Playback Buttons ..................................................65 Recording ..........................................................................89 16-Track Sequencer ....................................................115 QS ** refers to the page number in Quick Start. Index A new song ..................................................................90 Along with a Song ........................................................94 Redoing recordings ......................................................95 Track buttons ...............................................................95 With Accompaniment ..................................................92 Remote Control .................................................... 7071, 147 Repeat ................................................................................86 Replace Recording ...........................................................117
[Reset] button ....................................................................65 Restoring the Factory Settings .........................................147 Reverb ................................................................................28 Right-hand tone .................................................................25 Root note ............................................................................48 Rotary effect .....................................................................143 S Saving ..............................................................................101 Compatibility .............................................................103 User Style ...................................................................134
[Score Display] button .......................................................73 Screens 16-track Sequencer screen ..........................................113 Advanced 3D screen ....................................................30 Basic screen ............................................................20, 47 Chord Sequencer screen .............................................120 Copy Song screen .......................................................105 Copy Style screen .......................................................136 Copy User Programs screen ...............................110111 Count In settings screen ...............................................82 Countdown settings screen ..........................................56 Delete Song screen .....................................................104 Delete Style screen .....................................................135 Delete User Program screen .......................................110 Effect screen .................................................................35 Equalizer screen .....................................................3334 File screen ....................................................................99 Functions screen .........................................................141 Load User Program screen .........................................109 Marker screen ..............................................................84 Melody Intelligence screen ..........................................59 Metronome screen ........................................................43 MIDI Setting Screen ...................................................159 Notation screen ............................................................73 Part Balance screen ......................................................62 Piano screen ...........................................................2021 Program Change Screen .............................................159 Rec Mode screen ........................................................117 Rename screen ........................................... 102, 107, 134 189 Index Reverb screen ...............................................................28 Save Song screen ........................................................101 Save Style screen ........................................................134 Save User Program screen .........................................108 Song Edit screen .........................................................121 Song Search screen .......................................................67 Song Selection screen ...................................................64 Style Composer screen ...............................................130 Style Converter screen ...............................................132 Style Search screen .......................................................52 Style Selection screen ...................................................50 Tone search screen .......................................................24 Tone selection screen ...................................................22 Transpose screen ..........................................................87 User Program screen ..................................................107 Vocal Effects screen ......................................................36 Write User Program screen ........................................107 Search Music Style ...................................................................52 Song .............................................................................67 Tone .............................................................................24 SMF .................................................................................183 SMF Music files ...............................................................183 Soft pedal ...........................................................................18 Solo ..................................................................................114 Song Search .......................................................................67 Sostenuto pedal .................................................................18
[Sound Control] button .....................................................33 Sound Effects .....................................................................23 Sound Generator .............................................................183 Speaker Cable ....................................................................16 Split ...................................................................................61 Split Point ........................................................................138
[Start/Stop] button ............................................................54 Stretch Tuning .................................................................142 Style Composer ...............................................................129 Style Converter ................................................................131 Style Orchestrator ..............................................................58
[Style Orchestrator] button ................................................58 Style Search .......................................................................52 Sync ...................................................................................54 T Tap Tempo ........................................................................80 Temperament ..................................................................141 Tempo ................................................................... 44, 53, 80 Tempo [-] [+] buttons .........................................................80 Tempo Mute ......................................................................81 Tempo Recording ............................................................127 Tone Buttons ......................................................................22 Tone List ..........................................................................170 Tone Search .......................................................................24 Tone Set ...........................................................................115 Touch Screen .............................................................19, 148 Touch the Notes .................................................................74 Track Assign ....................................................................152 Track Buttons ......................................................... 83, 91, 93 Transformer .......................................................................37 Transpose ..........................................................................87 Transpose (Song Edit) ......................................................124
[Transpose] button .............................................................87 Troubleshooting ..............................................................165 Tuning .............................................................................141 Tuning Curve ..................................................................142 Tx Channel .......................................................................160 U Undo (Song Edit) .............................................................122 USB Driver .......................................................................164 User Functions .................................................................142 User Image Display .........................................................145 User Memory ...................................................................134 Formatting .................................................................149 User Program ...................................................................107 Calling up ..................................................................108 Copying .....................................................................110 Deleting ......................................................................110 Loading ......................................................................109 Registering .................................................................107 Saving ........................................................................108 Transmitting PC Numbers .........................................111 User Style ...................................................................51, 129 Copying .....................................................................136 Deleting ......................................................................135 Saving ........................................................................134 V Variation ............................................................................46
[Variation] button ..............................................................57 V-LINK ............................................................................157 Vocal Count-In ...................................................................39 Vocal Effect ........................................................................36
[Vocal Effect] button ..........................................................36 Vocal Keyboard .................................................................40 Volume CD ................................................................................72 190 QS ** refers to the page number in Quick Start. Metronome ..................................................................44 Microphone ..................................................................19 Overall .........................................................................18
[Volume] knob ...................................................................18 X XG lite ..............................................................................183 Index QS ** refers to the page number in Quick Start. 191 Information When you need repair service, call your nearest Roland Service Center or authorized Roland distributor in your country as shown below. AFRICA EGYPT Al Fanny Trading Office 9, EBN Hagar A1 Askalany Street, ARD E1 Golf, Heliopolis, Cairo 11341, EGYPT TEL: 20-2-417-1828 REUNION Maison FO - YAM Marcel 25 Rue Jules Hermann, Chaudron - BP79 97 491 Ste Clotilde Cedex, REUNION ISLAND TEL: (0262) 218-429 SOUTH AFRICA That Other Music Shop(PTY)Ltd. 11 Melle St., Braamfontein, Johannesbourg, SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (011) 403 4105 FAX: (011) 403 1234 Paul Bothner(PTY)Ltd. 17 Werdmuller Centre, Main Road, Claremont 7708 SOUTH AFRICA TEL: (021) 674 4030 ASIA CHINA Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd. 5F. No.1500 Pingliang Road Shanghai 200090, CHINA TEL: (021) 5580-0800 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd.
(BEIJING OFFICE) 10F. No.18 3 Section Anhuaxili Chaoyang District Beijing 100011 CHINA TEL: (010) 6426-5050 Roland Shanghai Electronics Co.,Ltd.
(GUANGZHOU OFFICE) 2/F., No.30 Si You Nan Er Jie Yi Xiang, Wu Yang Xin Cheng, Guangzhou 510600, CHINA TEL: (020) 8736-0428 HONG KONG Tom Lee Music Co., Ltd. Service Division 22-32 Pun Shan Street, Tsuen Wan, New Territories, HONG KONG TEL: 2415 0911 Parsons Music Ltd. 8th Floor, Railway Plaza, 39 Chatham Road South, T.S.T, Kowloon, HONG KONG TEL: 2333 1863 INDIA Rivera Digitec (India) Pvt. Ltd. 409, Nirman Kendra Mahalaxmi Flats Compound Off. Dr. Edwin Moses Road, Mumbai-400011, INDIA TEL: (022) 2493 9051 INDONESIA PT Citra IntiRama J1. Cideng Timur No. 15J-150 Jakarta Pusat INDONESIA TEL: (021) 6324170 KOREA Cosmos Corporation 1461-9, Seocho-Dong, Seocho Ku, Seoul, KOREA TEL: (02) 3486-8855 MALAYSIA Roland Asia Pacific Sdn. Bhd. 45-1, Block C2, Jalan PJU 1/39, Dataran Prima, 47301 Petaling Jaya, Selangor, MALAYSIA TEL: (03) 7805-3263 PHILIPPINES G.A. Yupangco & Co. Inc. 339 Gil J. Puyat Avenue Makati, Metro Manila 1200, PHILIPPINES TEL: (02) 899 9801 SINGAPORE SWEE LEE MUSIC COMPANY PTE. LTD. 150 Sims Drive, SINGAPORE 387381 TEL: 6846-3676 CRISTOFORI MUSIC PTE LTD Blk 3014, Bedok Industrial Park E,
#02-2148, SINGAPORE 489980 TEL: 6243-9555 TAIWAN ROLAND TAIWAN ENTERPRISE CO., LTD. Room 5, 9fl. No. 112 Chung Shan N.Road Sec.2, Taipei, TAIWAN, R.O.C. TEL: (02) 2561 3339 THAILAND Theera Music Co. , Ltd. 330 Verng NakornKasem, Soi 2, Bangkok 10100, THAILAND TEL: (02) 2248821 VIETNAM Saigon Music Suite DP-8 40 Ba Huyen Thanh Quan Street Hochiminh City, VIETNAM TEL: (08) 930-1969 AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND AUSTRALIA/
NEW ZEALAND Roland Corporation Australia Pty.,Ltd. 38 Campbell Avenue Dee Why West. NSW 2099 AUSTRALIA For Australia Tel: (02) 9982 8266 For New Zealand Tel: (09) 3098 715 CENTRAL/LATIN AMERICA ARGENTINA Instrumentos Musicales S.A. Av.Santa Fe 2055
(1123) Buenos Aires ARGENTINA TEL: (011) 4508-2700 BARBADOS A&B Music Supplies LTD 12 Webster Industrial Park Wildey, St.Michael, Barbados TEL: (246)430-1100 BRAZIL Roland Brasil Ltda. Rua San Jose, 780 Sala B Parque Industrial San Jose Cotia - Sao Paulo - SP, BRAZIL TEL: (011) 4615 5666 CHILE Comercial Fancy II S.A. Rut.: 96.919.420-1 Nataniel Cox #739, 4th Floor Santiago - Centro, CHILE TEL: (02) 688-9540 COLOMBIA Centro Musical Ltda. Cra 43 B No 25 A 41 Bododega 9 Medellin, Colombia TEL: (574)3812529 COSTA RICA JUAN Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Ave.1. Calle 11, Apartado 10237, San Jose, COSTA RICA TEL: 258-0211 CURACAO Zeelandia Music Center Inc. Orionweg 30 Curacao, Netherland Antilles TEL:(305)5926866 DOMINICAN REPUBLIC Instrumentos Fernando Giraldez Calle Proyecto Central No.3 Ens.La Esperilla Santo Domingo, Dominican Republic TEL:(809) 683 0305 ECUADOR Mas Musika Rumichaca 822 y Zaruma Guayaquil - Ecuador TEL:(593-4)2302364 EL SALVADOR OMNI MUSIC 75 Avenida Norte y Final Alameda Juan Pablo II, Edificio No.4010 San Salvador, EL SALVADOR TEL: 262-0788 GUATEMALA Casa Instrumental Calzada Roosevelt 34-01,zona 11 Ciudad de Guatemala Guatemala TEL:(502) 599-2888 HONDURAS Almacen Pajaro Azul S.A. de C.V. BO.Paz Barahona 3 Ave.11 Calle S.O San Pedro Sula, Honduras TEL: (504) 553-2029 MARTINIQUE Musique & Son Z.I.Les Mangle 97232 Le Lamantin Martinique F.W.I. TEL: 596 596 426860 Gigamusic SARL 10 Rte De La Folie 97200 Fort De France Martinique F.W.I. TEL: 596 596 715222 MEXICO Casa Veerkamp, s.a. de c.v. Av. Toluca No. 323, Col. Olivar de los Padres 01780 Mexico D.F. MEXICO TEL: (55) 5668-6699 NICARAGUA Bansbach Instrumentos Musicales Nicaragua Altamira D'Este Calle Principal de la Farmacia 5ta.Avenida 1 Cuadra al Lago.#503 Managua, Nicaragua TEL: (505)277-2557 PANAMA SUPRO MUNDIAL, S.A. Boulevard Andrews, Albrook, Panama City, REP. DE PANAMA TEL: 315-0101 PARAGUAY Distribuidora De Instrumentos Musicales J.E. Olear y ESQ. Manduvira Asuncion PARAGUAY TEL: (595) 21 492147 PERU Audionet Distribuciones Musicales SAC Juan Fanning 530 Miraflores Lima - Peru TEL: (511) 4461388 TRINIDAD AMR Ltd Ground Floor Maritime Plaza Barataria Trinidad W.I. TEL: (868)638 6385 URUGUAY Todo Musica S.A. Francisco Acuna de Figueroa 1771 C.P.: 11.800 Montevideo, URUGUAY TEL: (02) 924-2335 VENEZUELA Instrumentos Musicales Allegro,C.A. Av.las industrias edf.Guitar import
#7 zona Industrial de Turumo Caracas, Venezuela TEL: (212) 244-1122 EUROPE AUSTRIA Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH. Austrian Office Eduard-Bodem-Gasse 8, A-6020 Innsbruck, AUSTRIA TEL: (0512) 26 44 260 BELGIUM/FRANCE/
HOLLAND/
LUXEMBOURG Roland Central Europe N.V. Houtstraat 3, B-2260, Oevel
(Westerlo) BELGIUM TEL: (014) 575811 CZECH REP. K-AUDIO Kardasovska 626. CZ-198 00 Praha 9, CZECH REP. TEL: (2) 666 10529 DENMARK Roland Scandinavia A/S Nordhavnsvej 7, Postbox 880, DK-2100 Copenhagen DENMARK TEL: 3916 6200 FINLAND Roland Scandinavia As, Filial Finland Elannontie 5 FIN-01510 Vantaa, FINLAND TEL: (0)9 68 24 020 GERMANY Roland Elektronische Musikinstrumente HmbH. Oststrasse 96, 22844 Norderstedt, GERMANY TEL: (040) 52 60090 GREECE STOLLAS S.A. Music Sound Light 155, New National Road Patras 26442, GREECE TEL: 2610 435400 HUNGARY Roland East Europe Ltd. Warehouse Area DEPO Pf.83 H-2046 Torokbalint, HUNGARY TEL: (23) 511011 IRELAND Roland Ireland G2 Calmount Park, Calmount Avenue, Dublin 12 Republic of IRELAND TEL: (01) 4294444 ITALY Roland Italy S. p. A. Viale delle Industrie 8, 20020 Arese, Milano, ITALY TEL: (02) 937-78300 NORWAY Roland Scandinavia Avd. Kontor Norge Lilleakerveien 2 Postboks 95 Lilleaker N-0216 Oslo NORWAY TEL: 2273 0074 POLAND MX MUSIC SP.Z.O.O. UL. Gibraltarska 4. PL-03664 Warszawa POLAND TEL: (022) 679 44 19 PORTUGAL Roland Iberia, S.L. Portugal Office Cais das Pedras, 8/9-1 Dto 4050-465, Porto, PORTUGAL TEL: 22 608 00 60 ROMANIA FBS LINES Piata Libertatii 1, 535500 Gheorgheni, ROMANIA TEL: (266) 364 609 RUSSIA MuTek 3-Bogatyrskaya Str. 1.k.l 107 564 Moscow, RUSSIA TEL: (095) 169 5043 SPAIN Roland Iberia, S.L. Paseo Garca Faria, 33-35 08005 Barcelona SPAIN TEL: 93 493 91 00 SWEDEN Roland Scandinavia A/S SWEDISH SALES OFFICE Danvik Center 28, 2 tr. S-131 30 Nacka SWEDEN TEL: (0)8 702 00 20 SWITZERLAND Roland (Switzerland) AG Landstrasse 5, Postfach, CH-4452 Itingen, SWITZERLAND TEL: (061) 927-8383 UKRAINE TIC-TAC Mira Str. 19/108 P.O. Box 180 295400 Munkachevo, UKRAINE TEL: (03131) 414-40 UNITED KINGDOM Roland (U.K.) Ltd. Atlantic Close, Swansea Enterprise Park, SWANSEA SA7 9FJ, UNITED KINGDOM TEL: (01792) 702701 MIDDLE EAST BAHRAIN Moon Stores No.16, Bab Al Bahrain Avenue, P.O.Box 247, Manama 304, State of BAHRAIN TEL: 17 211 005 CYPRUS Radex Sound Equipment Ltd. 17, Diagorou Street, Nicosia, CYPRUS TEL: (022) 66-9426 IRAN MOCO INC. No.41 Nike St., Dr.Shariyati Ave., Roberoye Cerahe Mirdamad Tehran, IRAN TEL: (021) 285-4169 ISRAEL Halilit P. Greenspoon & Sons Ltd. 8 Retzif Ha'aliya Hashnya St. Tel-Aviv-Yafo ISRAEL TEL: (03) 6823666 JORDAN AMMAN Trading Agency 245 Prince Mohammad St., Amman 1118, JORDAN TEL: (06) 464-1200 KUWAIT EASA HUSAIN AL-YOUSIFI
& SONS CO. Abdullah Salem Street, Safat, KUWAIT TEL: 243-6399 LEBANON Chahine S.A.L. Gerge Zeidan St., Chahine Bldg., Achrafieh, P.O.Box: 16-
5857 Beirut, LEBANON TEL: (01) 20-1441 OMAN TALENTZ CENTRE L.L.C. P.O. BOX 37, MUSCAT, POSTAL CODE 113 TEL: 931-3705 QATAR Al Emadi Co. (Badie Studio &
Stores) P.O. Box 62, Doha, QATAR TEL: 4423-554 SAUDI ARABIA aDawliah Universal Electronics APL Corniche Road, Aldossary Bldg., 1st Floor, Alkhobar, SAUDI ARABIA P.O.Box 2154, Alkhobar 31952 SAUDI ARABIA TEL: (03) 898 2081 SYRIA Technical Light & Sound Center Rawda, Abdul Qader Jazairi St. Bldg. No. 21, P.O.BOX 13520, Damascus, SYRIA TEL: (011) 223-5384 TURKEY Ant Muzik Aletleri Ithalat Ve Ihracat Ltd Sti Siraselviler Caddesi Siraselviler Pasaji No:74/20 Taksim - Istanbul, TURKEY TEL: (0212) 2449624 U.A.E. Zak Electronics & Musical Instruments Co. L.L.C. Zabeel Road, Al Sherooq Bldg., No. 14, Grand Floor, Dubai, U.A.E. TEL: (04) 3360715 NORTH AMERICA CANADA Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Head Office) 5480 Parkwood Way Richmond B. C., V6V 2M4 CANADA TEL: (604) 270 6626 Roland Canada Music Ltd.
(Toronto Office) 170 Admiral Boulevard Mississauga On L5T 2N6 CANADA TEL: (905) 362 9707 U. S. A. Roland Corporation U.S. 5100 S. Eastern Avenue Los Angeles, CA 90040-2938, U. S. A. TEL: (323) 890 3700 As of January 15, 2005 (ROLAND)
frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
---|---|---|---|---|
1 | 2005-03-03 | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | Original Equipment |
app s | Applicant Information | |||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
1 | Effective |
2005-03-03
|
||||
1 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Roland Corporation
|
||||
1 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0012075693
|
||||
1 | Physical Address |
1-5-3, Shinmiyakoda
|
||||
1 |
Kita-ku,Hamamatsu, Sizuoka,, N/A 431-2103
|
|||||
1 |
Japan
|
|||||
app s | TCB Information | |||||
1 | TCB Application Email Address |
T******@TIMCOENGR.COM
|
||||
1 | TCB Scope |
A1: Low Power Transmitters below 1 GHz (except Spread Spectrum), Unintentional Radiators, EAS (Part 11) & Consumer ISM devices
|
||||
app s | FCC ID | |||||
1 | Grantee Code |
SOP
|
||||
1 | Equipment Product Code |
KR107
|
||||
app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
1 | Name |
H****** N********
|
||||
1 | Title |
Assistant Manager
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
81-53********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
81-53********
|
||||
1 |
H******@roland.com
|
|||||
app s | Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
n/a | ||||||
app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
1 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
1 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
1 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Equipment Class | JBP - Part 15 Class B Computing Device Peripheral | ||||
1 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | ELECTRONIC PIANO WITH USB PORT | ||||
1 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | Modular Equipment Type | Does not apply | ||||
1 | Purpose / Application is for | Original Equipment | ||||
1 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
1 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
1 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
1 | Firm Name |
Roland Corporation
|
||||
1 | Name |
T******** H****
|
||||
1 | Telephone Number |
12345********
|
||||
1 | Fax Number |
12345********
|
||||
1 |
@******@.
|
|||||
Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
1 | 1 | 15B |
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC